Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
To:
All holders of
Flight Manual EC 135 T2+
CHANGE INSTRUCTIONS
FLIGHT MANUAL EC 135 T2+
Revision No. 12.1; JAN 27, 2016
w Change procedure:
1. Remove/insert all pages affected by this revision in accordance with the attached filing list.
Pages having an entry in the EFFECTIVITY column may exist in two or more different versions.
The EFFECTIVITY feature on the page heading indicates which page applies to your particular
helicopter configuration. Check the EFFECTIVITY features of each sheet (front and back page)
and determine which sheet applies to your helicopter. Insert that sheet in the binder. Discard only
those sheets which do not apply.
NOTE D Do not discard pages having an effectivity statement, e.g. After SB ...... that
at present may not apply to the helicopter unless however, it is absolutely
certain that the stated Service Bulletin will never be incorporated, or any other
stated condition will never apply.
2. Confirm the completion by entering date and signature in the RECORD OF REVISIONS, in the
RECORD OF SUPPLEMENT REVISIONS and in the RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS.
3. Destroy all pages replaced by this revision to prevent their inadvertent use.
NOTE D With this publication two revisions 12 and 12.1 are published.
D Revision 12 of the Pilots Checklist corresponds to Revision 12.1 of the Flight
Manual.
w Revision Highlights:
Section
Description of Change
Preliminary Pages
Two
Three
Four
page - 1
Section
Seven
Nine (FMS)
Description of Change
NEW engine control panel
Minor changes
Subsection 9.0, additional compatibility and performance data
LOS 9.1, changes to reflect this FMS-revision
FMS 9.1-4, OEI Training; Rev. 5, 25.01.2016
FMS 9.16, Limitations (T/O GM 2950kg), Rev. 4, 18.12.2015
FMS 9.1-8, OEI Training ... T/O up to 2950 kg; Rev. 2, 25.01.2016
LOS 9.2, changes to reflect this FMS-revision
FMS 9.2-20, External hoist system; Rev. 3.1, 17.12.2015
FMS 9.2-58, MARMS; Rev. 2.1, 02.12.2015
FMS 9.2-59, Standard cockpit illumination; Rev. 1.2, 27.01.2016
FMS 9.2-82, Weather Radar System RDR1600; Rev. 0.1, 27.01.2016
FMS 9.2-86, NVIS/NVG; Rev. 6.1, 15.01.2016
FMS 9.2-99, Mechanical Air Conditioning Unit; Rev. 1.1, 27.01.2016
FMS 9.2-112, Garmin GTN 650/750...; Rev. 1, 20.01.2016
FMS 9.2-117, External hoist system...; Rev. 1.1, 17.12.2015
FILING LIST
Sheets/Pages
to be
removed
Temp.
Rev. No.
EFFECTIVITY /
DATE /
REMARK
PRELIMINARY PAGES
Sheets/Pages
to be
inserted
Temp.
Rev. No.
Temporary Revision
LOTR -1/
8/
LETRP-1/
8/
4-23
page - 2
EFFECTIVITY /
DATE /
REMARK
Sheets/Pages
to be
removed
Rev. No.
EFFECTIVITY/
DATE
Sheets/Pages
to be
inserted
Rev. No.
EFFECTIVITY/
DATE
PRELIMINARY PAGES
LOR -1/LOR - 2
11.4/11.6
LOR -1/LOR - 2
11.4/12.1
LEP 1/LEP 2
11.6/11.6
LEP 1/LEP 2
12.1/12.1
LEP 3/LEP 4
11.6/11.6
LEP 3/LEP 4
12.1/12.1
LEP 5/LEP 6
11.6/11.6
LEP 5/LEP 6
12.1/12.1
LEP 7/LEP 8
11.6/11.6
LEP 7/LEP 8
12.1/12.1
LEP 9/
LEP 9/
12.1/
OOM 1/OOM 2
11/11
OOM 1/OOM 2
12.1/12.1
OOM 3/OOM 4
11/11
OOM 3/OOM 4
12.1/12.1
SECTION 2
TOC 2
complete
Section 2
2-7 to 2-18
2-35/2-36
up to 10
9/11
TOC 2
complete
Section 2
2-7 to 2-18
2-35/2-36
up to 12
up to 12
9/12
SECTION 3
TOC 3
complete
Section 3
complete
up to 11
up to 11
TOC 3
complete
Section 3
complete
up to 12.1
up to 12.1
SECTION 4
TOC 4
complete
Section 4
complete
up to 11
up to 11
TOC 4
complete
Section 4
complete
up to 12.1
up to 12.1
SECTION 7
TOC 7
complete
Section 7
complete
up to 11.6
up to 11.6
TOC 7
complete
Section 7
complete
up to 12.1
up to 12.1
SECTION 9
9.0
11.5
9.0
12.1
SECTION 9.1
LOS 9.1
complete
FMS 9.1-4
complete
11.5
up to 4
LOS 9.1
complete
FMS 9.1-4
complete
12.1
up to 5
page - 3
Sheets/Pages
to be
removed
FMS 9.1-6
page 1 to 6
page 17 to 24
41/
FMS 9.1-8
complete
Rev. No.
up to 3
up to 1
3/
up to 1
EFFECTIVITY/
DATE
Sheets/Pages
to be
inserted
FMS 9.1-6
page 1 to 6
page 17 to 24
41/
FMS 9.1-8
complete
Rev. No.
up to 4
up to 4
4/
up to 2
SECTION 9.2
LOS 9.2
complete
FMS 9.2-20
page 1 to 4
page 19 to 22
FMS 9.2-58
complete
FMS 9.2-59
complete
FMS 9.2-82
complete
FMS 9.2-86
complete
FMS 9.2-99
complete
FMS 9.2-112
complete
FMS 9.2-117
complete
page - 4
11.6
up to 3
up to 2
up to 2
up to 1.1
0
up to 6
up to 1
up to 0.1
0
LOS 9.2
complete
FMS 9.2-20
page 1 to 4
page 19 to 22
FMS 9.2-58
complete
FMS 9.2-59
complete
FMS 9.2-82
complete
FMS 9.2-86
complete
FMS 9.2-99
complete
FMS 9.2-112
complete
FMS 9.2-117
complete
12.1
up to 3.1
up to 3.1
up to 2.1
up to 1.2
up to 0.1
up to 6.1
up to 1.1
up to 1
up to 1.1
EFFECTIVITY/
DATE
LOG OF REVISIONS
FIRST ISSUE
REVISION
ORIGINAL
FEB 21, 2006
(EASA Approval No. see title page)
REVISION
7
JUN 11, 2010
(EASA Approval No. 10030335)
REVISION
REVISION
7.1
REVISION
1
OCT 24, 2006
(EASA Approval No. R.C.01899)
REVISION
7.2
REVISION
7.3
REVISION
7.4
0.1
REVISION
1.1
REVISION
1.2
REVISION
1.3
REVISION
2
JUL 23, 2007
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01338)
REVISION
2.1
REVISION
3
NOV 27, 2007
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01360)
REVISION
4
FEB 18, 2008
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01430)
REVISION
5
JUN 10, 2008
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01475 & R.A.01480)
REVISION
5.1
REVISION
6
DEC 05, 2008
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01565)
REVISION
6.1
REVISION
6.2
REVISION
6.3
6.4
REVISION
8
JUL 05, 2011
(EASA Approval No. 10035615)
REVISION
8.1
REVISION
8.2
REVISION
9
MAR 23, 2012
(EASA Approval No. 10038927)
REVISION
10
JUL 17, 2012
(EASA Approval No. 10040621)
REVISION
10.1
REVISION
10.2
REVISION
10.3
REVISION
10.4
REVISION
11
MAY 12, 2014
(EASA Approval No. 10048914, REV. 1)
REVISION
11.1
REVISION
11.2
REVISION
11.3
CONTINUED
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 11.4
LOR - 1
REVISION
11.4
REVISION
11.5
REVISION
11.6
REVISION
12
DEZ 18, 2015
(EASA Approval No. 10055871, REV. 1)
REVISION
12.1
REVISION 12.1
Date: JAN 27, 2016
Revision No. 12.1 to FLM reference revision 12 is approved under authority of DOA No.
EASA.21J.034.
LOR - 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 135 T2+
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Revisions as necessary.
The column Approved by which is only shown for approved pages shows either the
approving authority (e.g. EASA) or, in case of minor changes according to DOA No.
EASA.21J.034, DOA.
Page
Title
Approving Authorities
Title
Manual Content
LOR 1
R LOR 2
ROR 1 thru 2
ROSR 1 thru 10
R LEP 1 thru 6
R LEP 7 thru 9
ROTR 1 thru 2
ROIV 1 thru 6
ROOT 1 thru 4
R OOM 1 thru 4
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Approved by
EASA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
Rev
Remarks/Effectivity
No.
4
1
4
2
11.4
12.1
12.1
12.1
Log of Revisions
Log of Revisions
Record of Revisions
Record of Supplement Revisions
List of Effective Pages (part 1)
List of Effective Pages (part 2)
Record of Temporary Revisions
Record of Installed Software
Versions
LEP 1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Page
EC 135 T2+
Page
2-7
Section 1
EASA
1-i/
(1-ii
blank)
1-1
EASA
1-2
EASA
1-3
EASA
1-4
EASA
1-5
EASA
1-6
EASA
1-7
EASA
1-8
EASA
1-9
EASA
1-10
EASA
1-11
EASA
1-12
EASA
1-13
EASA
1-14
EASA
1-15
EASA
1-16
EASA
1-17
EASA
11
1-18
EASA
11
1-19
EASA
1-20
EASA
1-21
EASA
1-22
EASA
Section 2
2-8
EASA
2-9
EASA
10
2-10
EASA
2-11
EASA
12
2-12
EASA
12
2-13
EASA
2-14
EASA
12
2-15
EASA
12
2-16
EASA
2-17
EASA
12
2-18
EASA
2-19
EASA
2-20
EASA
2-21
EASA
2-22
EASA
2-23
EASA
2-24
EASA
2-25
EASA
2-26
EASA
2-27
EASA
2-28
EASA
2-29
EASA
2-30
EASA
2-31
EASA
2-32
EASA
2-33
EASA
2-34
EASA
2-i
EASA
2-35
EASA
2-ii
EASA
12
2-iii/
(2-iv
blank)
2-1
EASA
2-36
EASA
12
EASA
11
2-2
EASA
2-3
EASA
2-4
EASA
2-5
EASA
2-6
EASA
LEP 2
Section 3
R
R
R
R
3-i
3-ii
3-iii
3-iv
3-1
3-2
3-3
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
EASA
EASA
EASA
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12
7
7
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Page
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
Approved
by
EASA
EASA
EASA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
DOA
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
10
3
5
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
Page
R 3-44
DOA
12.1
R 3-45
DOA
12.1
R 3-46
DOA
12.1
R 3-47
DOA
12.1
R 3-48
DOA
12.1
R 3-49
DOA
12.1
R 3-50
DOA
12.1
R 3-51
DOA
12.1
R 3-52
DOA
12.1
R 3-53
DOA
12.1
R 3-54
DOA
12.1
R 3-55
DOA
12.1
R 3-56
DOA
12.1
R 3-57
DOA
12.1
R 3-58
DOA
12.1
R 3-59
DOA
12.1
R 3-60
DOA
12.1
R 3-61
DOA
12.1
R 3-62
DOA
12.1
R 3-63
DOA
12.1
R 3-64
DOA
12.1
R 3-65
DOA
12.1
R 3-66
DOA
12.1
R 3-67
DOA
12.1
R 3-68
DOA
12.1
R 3-69
DOA
12.1
N 3-70
DOA
12.1
Section 4
R 3-34
DOA
12.1
R 3-35
DOA
12.1
R 4-i
DOA
12.1
R 3-36
DOA
12.1
4-ii
EASA
11
R 3-37
DOA
12.1
R 4-1
DOA
12.1
R 3-38
DOA
12.1
R 4-2
DOA
12.1
R 3-39
DOA
12.1
4-3
EASA
R 3-40
DOA
12.1
4-4
EASA
R 3-41
DOA
12.1
4-5
EASA
R 3-42
DOA
12.1
4-6
EASA
R 3-43
DOA
12.1
4-7
EASA
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
EC 135 T2+
LEP 3
FLIGHT MANUAL
Page
EC 135 T2+
Page
4-8
EASA
10
5-6
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-9
EASA
12
5-7
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-10
EASA
12
5-8
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-11
EASA
12
5-9
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-12
EASA
5-10
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-13
EASA
12
5-11
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-14
EASA
5-12
EASA
subsection 5.1
R 4-15
DOA
12.1
5-13
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-16
EASA
5-14
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-17
EASA
12
5-15
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-18
EASA
10
5-16
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-19
EASA
11
5-17
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-20
EASA
11
5-18
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-21
EASA
11
5-19
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-22
EASA
11
5-20
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-23
EASA
12
5-21
EASA
subsection 5.1
R 4-24
DOA
12.1
5-22
EASA
subsection 5.1
R 4-25
DOA
12.1
5-23
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-26
EASA
11
5-24
EASA
subsection 5.1
R 4-27
DOA
12.1
4-28
EASA
11
5-25
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-29
EASA
5-26
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-30
EASA
12
5-27
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-31
EASA
5-28
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-32
EASA
10
5-29
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-33
EASA
10
5-30
EASA
subsection 5.1
4-34
EASA
5-31
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-32
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-33
EASA
subsection 5.1
Section 5
5-i
EASA
5-34
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-ii
EASA
5-35
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-iii
EASA
5-36
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-iv
EASA
5-37
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-1
EASA
11
subsection 5.1
5-38
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-2
EASA
10
subsection 5.1
5-39
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-3
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-40
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-4
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-41
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-5
EASA
subsection 5.1
5-42
EASA
subsection 5.1
LEP 4
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Page
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-60
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-64
5-65
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Page
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-69
5-70
5-71
5-72
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
5-82
5-83
5-84
EC 135 T2+
LEP 5
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 135 T2+
Page
Approved by
Rev
Remarks/Effectivity
No.
Section 9
Supplements 9.1
EASA and/or
DOA
EASA and/or
DOA
F details
d t il see LEP inside
i id each
h
For
supplement
supplement.
and
Supplements 9.2
LEP 6
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 135 T2+
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of Revisions as necessary.
Page
5-85
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
2 subsection 5.2
5-86
subsection 5.2
5-87
subsection 5.2
5-88
subsection 5.2
5-89
subsection 5.2
5-90
subsection 5.2
5-91
subsection 5.2
5-92
subsection 5.2
5-93
subsection 5.2
5-94
subsection 5.2
5-95
subsection 5.2
5-96
subsection 5.2
5-97
subsection 5.2
5-98
subsection 5.2
5-99
subsection 5.2
5-100
subsection 5.2
5-101
subsection 5.2
5-102
subsection 5.2
5-103
subsection 5.2
5-104
subsection 5.2
5-105
subsection 5.2
5-106
subsection 5.2
5-107
subsection 5.2
5-108
subsection 5.2
5-109
subsection 5.2
5-110
subsection 5.2
5-111
subsection 5.2
5-112
subsection 5.2
5-113
subsection 5.2
5-114
subsection 5.2
5-115
subsection 5.2
5-116
subsection 5.2
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Rev
No.
2
2
2
2
Page
5-117
5-118
5-119
5-120
Remarks/
Effectivity
subsection 5.2
subsection 5.2
subsection 5.2
subsection 5.2
Section 6
6-i
6-ii
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25/(6-26 blank)
11.6
11.6
0
0
0
0
0
11.6
11.6
11.6
11.6
8
11.6
11.6
8
11.6
11
8
11.6
11
11
11
11
11.6
11.6
11.6
11.6
LEP 7
FLIGHT MANUAL
EC 135 T2+
Page
Form MBR long.
Form MBR lat.
Form EL
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
-
Section 7
R
R
R
R
N
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
7-i
7-ii
7-iii
7-iv
7-v/(7-vi blank)
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
LEP 8
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
11
9
9
9
9
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
R 7-31
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
12.1
R 7-32
R 7-33
12.1
12.1
R 7-34
R 7-35
R 7-36
12.1
12.1
12.1
R 7-37
R 7-38
12.1
12.1
R 7-39
R 7-40
12.1
12.1
R 7-41
R 7-42
12.1
12.1
R 7-43
R 7-44
R 7-45
12.1
12.1
12.1
R 7-46
R 7-47
12.1
12.1
R 7-48
R 7-49
12.1
12.1
R 7-50
R 7-51
12.1
12.1
R 7-52
R 7-53
R 7-54
12.1
12.1
12.1
R 7-55
R 7-56
12.1
12.1
R 7-57
R 7-58
12.1
12.1
R 7-59
R 7-60
12.1
12.1
R 7-61
R 7-62
R 7-63
12.1
12.1
12.1
R 7-64
R 7-65
12.1
12.1
R 7-66
R 7-67
12.1
12.1
R 7-68
R 7-69
12.1
12.1
Page
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLIGHT MANUAL
Page
R
R
R
R
R
N
N
7-70
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-74
7-75
7-76
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
12.1
Section 8
8-i/(8-ii blank)
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
11.6
0
11.6
11.6
11.6
Section 9
Page
EC 135 T2+
Rev Remarks/
No. Effectivity
Section 10
R 9.0
12.1
R Log of Supple12.1
ments (LOS 9.1)
R Log of Supple12.1
ments (LOS 9.2)
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
L E P 9/(L E P 10 blank)
GENERAL
To achieve the required degree of safety, this manual must be used in conjunction with
the relevant regulations covering aircraft operation, such as aerial navigation laws in the
operators country.
It is essential for the crew to become familiar with the contents of this manual, special
certification requirements and any information specific to customized configurations, and
to check all revisions and related requirements.
2.
PAGE NUMBERING
The numbering of pages within each section consists of the section number or
designation, a dash and the consecutive number of the page beginning with 1; e.g. for
Section 3: 3-1, 3-2, etc.
Figures are likewise numbered consecutively by section, such as Fig. 3-1, Fig. 3-2, etc.
Exceptions:
The numbering of the Table of Contents pages preceding each section in this
manual consists of the section number, a dash and the consecutive Roman numeral
(lower case) of the page, beginning with i; e.g. for Section 3: 3-i, 3-ii, etc.
The page numbers of the Flight Manual Supplements and Appendices consist of
the section number, a dash, the number of the Supplement/Appendix, a dash and
the consecutive number of the page; e.g. for FMS 9.1-17: 9.1-171, 9.1-172, etc.
The numbers of blank reversed pages are printed on the preceding page by using dual
page numbering; e.g. 3-9 / (3-10 blank).
If, at a later date, pages have to be added to the initial printing, the new pages may carry
the number of the preceding page plus a letter suffix; e.g. 2-6A, 2-6B, etc.
2.1
Rev. 12.1
OOM - 1
The manufacturer retains the right to convert optional equipment to standard equipment
at any time as a product improvement program. FLM coverage of the converted optional
equipment, however, will remain as an FMS in Section 9 and also as an optional
equipment item entry in the Equipment List. An entry in the STD EQPT EFFECTIVITY
column of the Log of Supplements is used to indicate the converted optional equipment
by providing an effectivity statement of the affected helicopters.
FMSs of non-installed optional equipment and FMSs of non-intentioned special
operations, need not to be carried in the helicopter. These FMSs can be filed in the
binder EXTRANEOUS FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENTS.
2.2
3.
EFFECTIVITY STATEMENTS
3.1
The eight-digit numeric indicator begins with the four digits of the lowest assigned
manufacturer s serial number, to indicate first effectivity, and ends with the four digits of
the highest assigned manufacturers serial number, to indicate last effectivity, of an
unbroken sequence of assigned serial numbered helicopters. A hyphen is shown
between the two numbers. Open ended effectivity is indicated by 9999 in the last
effectivity, e.g. 0415-9999 indicates helicopter serial number S-415 and subsequent.
An SB effectivity is indicated as either Before SB... or After SB... meaning respectively
before and after incorporation of the specific numbered Service Bulletin on the helicopter.
OOM - 2
Rev. 12.1
3.2
3.3
4.
Do not discard pages having a page effectivity statement After SB...... that
at present may not apply to the helicopter unless however, it is absolutely
certain that the stated Service Bulletin will never be incorporated.
REVISION SERVICE
This manual is kept up-to-date by revisions and temporary revisions.
4.1
Revisions
Revisions are issued periodically. They are printed on white paper and are incorporated
into the Manual in accordance with a Change Instructions sheet which need not be
inserted in the Manual. Revisions are numbered consecutively beginning with the No. 1.
4.2
Temporary Revisions
Temporary revisions are provided to transmit information between revisions. They are
printed on yellow paper and are accompanied by a Change Instructions sheet and an
updated List of Effective Temporary Revisions page.
Temporary revisions are numbered consecutively beginning with the No. 1; e.g. Temp.
Rev. 1, Temp. Rev. 2, etc...
4.3
Revisions of Supplements
Revisions of Supplements are issued as required. They are independent from revisions
of the Basic Manual. Revisions of Supplements are numbered consecutively beginning
with the No. 1 (The original is Rev. 0). They are printed on white paper and are
incorporated into the Manual in accordance with a Change Instructions sheet which
need not to be inserted in the Manual.
Rev. 12.1
OOM - 3
4.4
Introductory material.
4.5
R
R
4.6
Approved Rev
by
No.
Remarks/
Effectivity
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
9.2-24-1
EASA
9.2-24-5
EASA
9.2-24-2
DOA
4.1
9.2-24-6
EASA
9.2-24-3
EASA
9.2-24-7
EASA
9.2-24-4
DOA
4.1
9.2-24-8
EASA
Remarks/
Effectivity
OOM - 4
When the page is approved by an authority (e.g. EASA) the LEP shows EASA in
column Approved by.
When the page is approved by AIRBUS Helicopters under authority of DOA No.
EASA.21J.034 the LEP shows DOA in column Approved by. See as example
table above.
Rev. 12.1
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.2
KINDS OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.3
BASIS OF CERTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
Loading limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.6.4
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.8.1
Forward flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.9
ALTITUDE LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
Demisting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
2.10.3
Icing conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
2.10.4
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2i
Page
2.14
FUEL LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.14.1
Fuel viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.14.2
Fuel temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.14.3
Fuel specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
2.14.5
Fuel additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
2.14.6
Fuel quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 17
2.15
OIL LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18
2.15.1
Oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18
2.15.2
Oil quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.15.5
2.15.6
2.16
2.16.1
2.16.2
2.17
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
2.17.1
2.17.2
Slope operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
2.17.3
Hover turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
2.17.4
2.17.5
2.17.6
2.17.7
Operational information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 20
2.18
INSTRUMENT MARKINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 21
2.18.1
Analog instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 21
2 ii
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 2-1
Fig. 2-2
Fig. 2-3
Fig. 2-4
Primary Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 11
Fig. 2-5
Fig. 2-6
Fig. 2-7
Anti-icing additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 16
Fig. 2-8
Fig. 2-9
Fig. 2-10
Fig. 2-11
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2 iii/( 2 iv blank)
2.10
2.10.1
If the helicopter is cold soaked for more than one hour below 19_C, respect
fuel temperature limitations for engine starting (see Para. 2.14.2).
If the helicopter is cold soaked for more than an hour below 27 C, the helicopter has to be heated up inside a hanger for a sufficient period before start up
and/ or by careful use of a hot air generator so that the temperature of all helicopter systems is increased above 27 C.
Aircraft ambient temperature limits are also affected by fuel temperature limits, 2.14.2.
The helicopter shall not be operated at ambient temperatures below the minimum fuel
temperature for the fuel in use.
EFFECTIVITY
2.10.2
All
Demisting system
An approved heating system for demisting must be installed.
2.10.3
Icing conditions
Flight into icing conditions is prohibited.
2.10.4
APPROVED
Rev. 12
2-7
2.11
CONDITION
Power OFF
85 %
Minimum Continuous
1500 kg GM < 1900 kg
1900 kg GM
97 %
97 %
80 %
85 %
Maximum Continuous
104 %
106 %
112 %
RPM-Light
AUDIO-Tone
Reset
NR 97 %
ON
Intermittent Low
Yes
NR 106 %
Flashing
Gong
Yes
NR 112 %
Flashing
Continuous High
No
2-8
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2.12
Transmission
(Helicopter)
Limits
max.
torque
max.
TOT
(Gasgenerator)
(Output Shaft)
_C
min. 60
min. 85 (20
sec)
max. 108 (20
sec)
CONDITION
Starting Transient
(max. 5 sec)
11.0
895
Starting
8.5
810
Transient
max.
N1-SPEED/
max. 102
(5 sec)
Partial power
(max. 2 x 10 % torque)
2 x 10
max.
N2-SPEED
106
10.0 2)
2 x 78
897
86.1 100
104
9.02)
2 x 69
879
85.3 99
104
30 sec. Power1)
13.5 2)
1 x 1283)
1024
91.7 105
104
13.0 2)
1 x 125
994
91.7 103.5
104
11.02)
1 x 89.5
942
87.4 101.3
104
1) Max. torque, max. N1 and max. TOT are logged automatically by the EECU. Read out
the stored values from the EECU and record duration and maximum value in the helicopter and engine logbook. For information and maintenance action refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual and the helicopter Maintenance Manual. Use of this OEI
Power settings may significantly reduce the engine life time.
2) Markings for torque, TOT and nN1 only.
3) When the 128% torque limit has been exceeded, read out the stored values from the
EECU and record duration and maximum value in the helicopter logbook. For information and maintenance action refer to the helicopter Maintenance Manual.
NOTE D When reaching topped values on FLI, the pilot has to respect the RPM values
with the collective.
D A transient AEO TOP power limit of 2 x 82% torque (10.4 FLI) has been established for VvVy and unintended use of max. 10 seconds duration only. Exceeding of any one of those limits requires maintenance action (refer to the
maintenance manual)
CAUTION
APPROVED
Rev. 10
2-9
2.13
2.13.1
Engine starter/generator
When starting engines, the starter energize time is the time which elapses between initiation of the starter and ignition in the turbine.
When performing engine ventilation, the starter energize time is the time which elapses
while the starter switch is placed to the VENT position.
To prevent starter overheat damage, the starter energize time is limited as follows:
EFFECTIVITY
If 25 Ah or 26 Ah or 27 Ah battery is installed.
30
60
30
60
30
30
EFFECTIVITY
EFFECTIVITY
seconds ON
seconds OFF
seconds ON
seconds OFF
seconds ON
minutes OFF
seconds ON
seconds OFF
seconds ON
seconds OFF
seconds ON
minutes OFF
All.
The 30 minute cooling period is required before beginning another starting cycle.
Maximum continuous load per generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A
PA > 15000 ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 A
2.13.2
2 - 10
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2.14
FUEL LIMITATIONS
2.14.1
Fuel viscosity
Maximum fuel viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 cSt
2.14.2
Fuel temperature
Minimum fuel temperature for engine starting (primary fuels, TS1, T1, T2) . . . . . . 19_C
Minimum fuel temperature for engine starting
(secondary fuels except TS1, T1, T2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35_C
2.14.3
Fuel specifications
NOTE
TYPE OF
FUEL
SPECIFICATION
Primary Fuels
NATO
symbol
USA
UK
CIS
Kerosene-50
(AVTURFSII)
JP-8
F 34
MILDTL-83133
DEFSTAN
91-87
DCSEA134
Kerosene-50
(AVTUR)
JET A-1
F 35
ASTM D1655
JET A-1
DEFSTAN
91-91
DCSEA134
Kerosene
ASTM D1655
JET A
F 44
MIL-DTL-5624
JP-5
DEFSTAN
91-86
DCSEA144
Fig. 2-4
Primary Fuels
NOTE D It is the operators responsibility to make certain that the fuel used contains an
anti-icing additive when necessary (see Para. 2.14.5). Additional antiicing
additives shall not be added to pre-blended fuels.
D Normally JP5/JP8 fuels are preblended with anti-icing additives.
APPROVED
Rev. 12
2 - 11
2 - 12
APPROVED
Rev. 12
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2 - 13
2.14.4
20000
17500
15000
TU75 installed
0
2500
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
EC135_FLH_0483_R
Fig. 2-5
NOTE
2 - 14
APPROVED
Rev. 12
2.14.5
Fuel additives
Anti-icing fuel additives:
EFFECTIVITY
When using fuels without anti-ice additive for fuel temperatures between 115C
and 205C, a minimum engine oil temperature has to be reached depending on
fuel temperature according to Fig. 2-6.
Engine oil warm up should be performed with collective fully down and engines
in IDLE or FLIGHT.
C)
10
12
15
15
19
20
30
5
Fig. 2-6
10
20
30
40
50
60
Minimum oil temperture ( C)
70
80
85
Minimum engine oil temperature (versus fuel temperature) required for power application
APPROVED
Rev. 12
2 - 15
EFFECTIVITY
After SB EC13511010
EFFECTIVITY
When using fuel without anti-icing additive for fuel temperaturesv13_C, a minimum engine oil temperature of + 50_C for continuous operation must be
reached.
After SB EC13571027
EFFECTIVITY
When using fuel without anti-icing additive for fuel temperaturesv15_C, a minimum engine oil temperature of + 50_C for continuous operation must be
reached. It is permissible to apply low power when the engine oil temperature
reaches 10_C (0_C for 3cSt oil) to reduce the ground run time.
All
Type
NATO
symbol
Joint
Service
Designat
EGME
S748
DiEGME
S1745
USA
UK
FRANCE
CIS
AL31
MIL-I27686 or
MIL-DTL27686
DERD
2451
AIR
3652
AL41
MIL-I85470 or
MIL-DTL85470
DEF STAN
68-252
AIR
3652
Fig. 2-7
2 - 16
Specifications
Anti-icing additives
APPROVED
Rev. 8
2.14.6
Fuel quantities
Fuel mass values are based on a fuel density of 0.8 kg/liter (8.018 lb/gal (imp.);
6.676 lb/gal (U.S.)).
EFFECTIVITY
TANK
TOTAL FUEL
USABLE FUEL
liters
kilograms
liters
kilograms
Main
565.0
452.0
560.75
448.60
Supply
115.0
92.0
109.80
87.80
Totals
680.0
544.0
670.55
536.40
EFFECTIVITY
TOTAL FUEL
USABLE FUEL
liters
kilograms
liters
kilograms
Main
593.1
474.50
588.85
471.10
Supply
116.9
93.50
111.70
89.30
Totals
710.0
568.00
700.55
560.40
4.25
2 x 2.6
9.45
kilograms
3.4
2 x 2.1
7.6
UNUSABLE FUEL
liters
4.25
2 x 2.6
9.45
kilograms
3.4
2 x 2.1
7.6
All
CAUTION
APPROVED
Rev. 12
liters
TANK
EFFECTIVITY
UNUSABLE FUEL
2 - 17
2.15
OIL LIMITATIONS
2.15.1
Oil specifications
Oil Type / Specifications
Engine
Main Transmission
Fenestron
Gearbox
for: 35_CvOATv50_C
for: 30_CvOATv50_C
NOTE
2.15.2
Oil quantities
Liters*
Engines (each tank)
Main Transmission
Fenestron Gearbox
*Oil mass values are assumed as 1.0 kg/ltr.
2.15.3
4.85
10.0 12.0
0.5
2.15.4
2 - 18
For oil warm up, the engines have to run in FLIGHT mode at low pitch, and the
gas generator speed (N1) must remain below 90%.
APPROVED
Rev. 9
Placard:
EXIT
Location: Inside, cockpit door LH and above sliding doors LH and RH
APPROVED
Rev. 9
2 - 35
Placard:
BEI GESCHLOSSENER TR
MUSS DER GRIFF VOLLSTNDIG
VERRIEGELT SEIN
(PARALLEL ZUM FENSTERRAHMEN)
WHEN THE DOOR IS CLOSED,
THE HANDLE MUST BE IN
FULLY CLOSED POSITION
(PARALLEL TO WINDOW FRAME)
Location: Sliding doors, inside, and cockpit door copilot, inside
Placard:
MAX 3 Kg
Location: Beside luggage net on LH and /or RH clamshell door
EFFECTIVITY
After SB EC13525018
Placard:
2 - 36
All
APPROVED
Rev. 12
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
3.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Basic rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Memory items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
Urgency of landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Resetting tripped circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Definition of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3i
Page
ENG EXCEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
ENG FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
ENG MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
ENG O FILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
ENG OF CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 19
ENG OIL P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
EPU DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
EXT PWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
FADEC FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
FLI DEGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
FLI FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
F FILT CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
F PUMP AFT and F PUMP FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
F PUMP AFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
F PUMP FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
F QTY DEGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
F QTY FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 28
FUEL FILT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
FUEL PRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 29
FUEL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
F VALVE CL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
GEN DISCON (single) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
GEN DISCON (both) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32
GEN OVHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
EFFECTIVITY
Up to S/N 999
HTG OVTEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33
EFFECTIVITY
HTG OVTEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 34
EFFECTIVITY
3 ii
All
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Page
HYD PRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
IDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35
INP FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
OVSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
OVSP/ ENG FAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
P0 MISCMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37
PITOT HTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
PRIME PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 38
REDUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
SHED EMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 39
STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
T1 MISCMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
TRGB CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 41
TRGB CHP CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
TWIST GRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
VEMD FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
XMSN CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43
XMSN CHP CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 43
XMSN OIL P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
XMSN OIL T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
XMSN OT CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
YAW SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 45
3.3
CPDS MALFUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 46
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 iii
Page
3 iv
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
Inflight Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.4.12
3.4.13
3.4.14
Autorotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
3.5
3.5.1
Cabin Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64
3.5.2
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
Tail Rotor Drive Failure / Fixed-pitch Tail Rotor Control Failure Forward Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 68
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
SECTION 3
EMERGENCY AND MALFUNCTION PROCEDURES
3.1
GENERAL
This section contains the recommended procedures for managing various types of emergencies, malfunctions and critical situations.
WARNING AFTER AN ACTUAL EMERGENCY OR MALFUNCTION MAKE AN ENTRY
IN THE HELICOPTER LOGBOOK AND, WHEN NECESSARY, THE AFFECTED SYSTEM LOGBOOK (E.G. ENGINE LOGBOOK). MAINTENANCE
ACTION MAY BE REQUIRED AND NECESSARY BEFORE NEXT FLIGHT.
For definitions of terms, abbreviations and symbols used in this Section, refer to Section 1.
3.1.1
Basic rules
These procedures deal with common emergencies. Although the procedures contained
in this section are considered the best available, the pilots sound judgement is of
paramount importance when confronted with an emergency. The pilot may deviate from
these procedures if judged necessary under the given circumstances (specific failure
condition, outside factors, and type of terrain overflown).
To assist the pilot during an inflight emergency, three basic rules have been established:
1. Maintain aircraft control
2. Analyse the situation
3. Take proper action
NOTE
3.1.2
It is impossible to establish a predetermined set of instructions which would provide a ready-made decision applicable to all situations.
Memory items
Emergency procedure steps which shall be performed immediately without reference to either this Manual or the pilots checklist are written in boldface letters on
a gray background (as shown here) and shall be committed to memory.
Therefore, those emergency procedures appearing without boldface letters on a gray
background may be accomplished referring to this Manual, and when time and situation
permit.
APPROVED
Rev. 12
3-1
3.1.3
Operating condition
The following terms are used in emergency procedures to describe the operating condition of a system, subsystem, assembly or component:
3.1.4
Affected
Normal
Urgency of landing
NOTE
The type of emergency and the emergency conditions combined with the pilots
analysis of the condition of the helicopter and his proficiency are of prime importance in determining the urgency of a landing.
The following terms are used to reflect the degree of urgency of an emergency landing
(for IFR operation observe FMS 9.2-44 and 9.2-56):
LAND IMMEDIATELY
The urgency of landing is paramount. Primary consideration is to assure survival of
the occupants. Landing in water, trees or other unsafe areas should be considered
only as a last resort.
LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (LAND ASAP)
Land without delay at the nearest adequate site (i.e. open field) at which a safe approach and landing can be made.
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
The landing site and duration of flight are at the discretion of the pilot. Extended flight
beyond the nearest approved landing area where appropriate assistance can be expected is not recommended.
3.1.5
3-2
APPROVED
Rev. 7
InFlight: A tripped cb shall not be reset in flight unless doing so is consistent with
explicit procedures specified in the approved Flight/Maintenance Manual, its
supplements and checklists used by the crew members or unless, in the judgment of
the pilotincommand, resetting the cb is necessary for the safe completion of the
flight. Crew members should limit resetting of cbs to one inflight reset where this
action is required.
No attempt should be made to reset a cb if it trips a second time.
Logbook entry: A detailed logbook writeup is a proven safety practice.
3.1.6
Definition of terms
The term
OEI flight condition .... Establish
is used as a leading step in some engine emergency procedures to express the following:
1. In case that power of affected engine tends to zero:
If deemed necessary, try to escape from immediate danger with both engines
operating.
Establish steady level flight and determine if the situation will allow for OEI flight.
As a rule of thumb, this can be done by checking that the sum of the individual
engine torques is lower than the OEI torque limit. If this is fulfilled, re-check OEI
power available by setting the affected engine to IDLE while maintaining the normal engine within appropriate OEI limit.
D If engine power is sufficient for OEI flight and if a safe OEI landing can be
assumed, continue with the remaining steps of the relevant procedure.
D If engine power is not sufficient for OEI flight or if a safe OEI landing is not
assured, LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. If necessary, re-establish power of
affected engine before landing. After landing perform single engine emergency shutdown of affected engine.
APPROVED
Rev. 7
3-3
3.2
3-4
APPROVED
Rev. 10
3.2.1
BAT
DISCH
Conditions/Indications
Battery is the only electrical power source.
NOTE
Procedure
1. DC VOLTS, GEN AMPS and BAT AMPS
Check
2. Electrical consumption
APPROVED
Rev. 3
3-5
BAT
TEMP
Conditions/Indications
Battery overtemperature (above 70 _C)
Warning GONG will be activated
Procedure
F ON GROUND
1. BAT MSTR sw
OFF
2. Engines
Shut down
CAUTION
F IN FLIGHT
OFF
3. Engine shutdown
Perform
Perform
Perform
6. BAT MSTR sw
OFF
Continue flight in VMC only. On CAD the BAT DISCON caution will appear.
NOTE
OFF
Hands on
4. Engines
Perform
NOTE
3-6
EFFECTIVITY
CHECK
ENG
Conditions/Indications
NOTE D Acknowledging the CHECK ENG warning might result in a general warning
panel GONG which can be acknowledged by a repeated pushing of the reset
button on the cyclic stick.
D Under very particular OEI conditions, i.e. autorotation flight at cold
temperatures with a very large right hand pedal input, the collective lever
value might fall below the SETO condition and the CHECK ENG warning will
be triggered.
Procedure
1. Affected engine
Identify
If engine is in IDLE:
3. Respective ENG MAIN sw
FLIGHT
If engine is OFF:
3.
EFFECTIVITY
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3-7
FIRE
or
(ENGINE 1)
FIRE
(ENGINE 2)
Conditions/Indications
Overtemperature in engine compartment
F ON GROUND
Respective engine will be automatically cut off, ACTIVE will illuminate on the
EMER OFF SW panel and F VALVE CL will illuminate on the CAD.
Check OFF
Perform
F IN FLIGHT
Establish
NOTE
Respective engine will be automatically cut off, ACTIVE will illuminate on the
EMER OFF SW panel and F VALVE CL will illuminate on the CAD.
3. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
NOTE
3-8
LAND IMMEDIATELY
For safety reasons alert and evacuate the passengers as soon as possible.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
LIMIT
(ON VEMD)
Conditions/Indications
One of the following limits is exceeded:
Torque, TOT, nN1, Mastmoment, OEI 30 sec. time limit, OEI 2.0 min. time limit, TOP
time limit
Reduce
LOW
FUEL 1
LOW
FUEL 2
and / or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Check
Check ON
Check in
Switch OFF
5. Bleed Air
For helicopters with 680 liters fuel tank (673 liters if selfsealing supplytanks are
installed)
EFFECTIVITY
EFFECTIVITY
6.
EFFECTIVITY
WARNING
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3-9
ROTOR
RPM
Conditions/Indications
NRo LOW
NRo HIGH
Audio signal at 112% or above - flashing light and continuous high tone (2400 Hz)
Procedure
Check
2. Collective lever
NOTE
XMSN
OIL P
Conditions/Indications
XMSN oil pressure is below minimum
3 - 10
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3.2.2
MASTER
CAUTION
Conditions/Indications
Caution indication appeared on CAD
Procedure
1. Caution indication on CAD
2. RESET pb
(on cyclic stick)
Push to reset
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 11
3.2.3
CAUTION INDICATIONS
BAT DISCON
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Battery is off-line (normal during EPU start or the BAT MSTR switch is in OFF position).
Procedure
1. BAT MSTR sw
Reset then ON
CAUTION INDICATIONS
BUSTIE OPN
and / or
(SYSTEM I)
BUSTIE OPN
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Electrical systems are separated
In some cases the generator(s) may be disconnected and GEN DISCON may not
appear
CAUTION
Procedure
1. GEN AMPS
3 - 12
GEN sw OFF
For the failed system (elctrical/generator) the essential bus will be supplied by
the remaining generator through the battery bus.
The SHED BUS can not be activated.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Perform
Observe that both generators are disconnected from the power distribution
system. When consumers are reduced, the remaining flight time on battery is at
least 30 minutes depending on battery type and load condition.
3 - 13
CAUTION INDICATIONS
CAU DEGR
(On VEMD if CAD is inoperative or on CAD if both VEMD lanes are inoperative)
Conditions/Indications
Degraded caution indication because of loss of CAD lane or both VEMD lanes
Procedure
see para 3.3.3 and 3.3.4
CAUTION INDICATIONS
CAD FAN
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of CAD fan has been detected during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST.
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
CAUTION INDICATIONS
CPDS OVHT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Normal operating temperature of instrument panel exceeded
Procedure
1. Pull for Heating/Defog knob
Push
Pull
turn to MAX
3 - 14
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
DEGRADE
or/ and
(SYSTEM I)
DEGRADE
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
FADEC degrade indicates a change of governing functions.
CAUTION D AVOID USING MAXIMUM POWER AND PERFORM POWER VARIATION SLOWLY.
D MAINTAIN, IN FLIGHT, A MINIMUM TORQUE OF 20% ON EACH
ENGINE.
D IN CASE OF ENG MAIN SWITCH FAILURE, FOR SHUTDOWN, USE
THE RESPECTIVE TWIST GRIP.
Procedure
1. Engine parameter
Monitor
(compare with normal engine, if
possible)
Perform
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 15
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG CHIP
or
(SYSTEM I)
ENG CHIP
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Metal particles detected in engine oil.
Procedure
F ON GROUND
1. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
F IN FLIGHT
Establish
2. Affected engine
Identify
1. Alternative:
3. Single engine emergency shutdown
Perform
2. Alternative:
3.
CAUTION
IDLE
3 - 16
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG CHP CT
ENG CHP CT
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
ENG CHIP CAUTION IS NOT AVAILABLE.
CAUTION
Procedure
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG EXCEED
(SYSTEM I)
or / and
(indication only on ground)
ENG EXCEED
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Counter for OEI 30 sec./ 2 min. power limitations expired or engine parameter has been
exceeded.
Procedure
Maintenance action required before flight.
ENG FAIL
or
(SYSTEM I)
ENG FAIL
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Respective N1-RPM below threshold value.
Procedure
1. OEI flight condition
Establish
2. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
3 - 17
ENG MANUAL
or
(SYSTEM I)
ENG MANUAL
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Engine MANUAL mode has been selected by setting ENG MODE SEL sw from NORM to
MAN.
NOTE
If ENG MANUAL comes together with TWIST GRIP, refer to TWIST GRIP
caution indication.
N1 limiter
WARNING OPERATE THE TWIST GRIP WITH GREAT CARE AND AVOID QUICK TWIST
GRIP ROTATIONS.
HOLD MIN. 10% TORQUE ON THE NORMAL ENGINE TO MAINTAIN
AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF NRO.
The ENG MANUAL mode may be used for training of the FADEC FAIL procedure.
After training is completed return to NORM mode.
Respective ENG MODE SEL selector sw
NORM
Check off
Check off
3 - 18
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG O FILT
ENG O FILT
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Engine oil filter contaminated.
NOTE
During starting the engines it is possible for the caution light to come on for up to
two minutes.
Procedure
1. Engine oil pressure and engine oil
temperature
Monitor
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG OF CT
or
(SYSTEM I)
ENG OF CT
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
CAUTION
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 19
CAUTION INDICATIONS
ENG OIL P
ENG OIL P
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Affected engine oil pressure below minimum.
Procedure
1. Engine oil pressure indicator (VEMD)
Check
Establish
3. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
CAUTION INDICATIONS
EPU DOOR
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
External power receptacle access door is open.
Procedure
F ON GROUND
Close
F IN FLIGHT
3 - 20
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
EXT PWR
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
External power is applied to the electrical distribution system.
NOTE
EXT PWR caution indication going OFF does not indicate that the EPU cable is
disconnected.
Procedure
After EPU starts:
1. EPU cable
Disconnect
Close
Check EPU door indication OFF
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 21
CAUTION INDICATIONS
FADEC FAIL
(SYSTEM I)
or
FADEC FAIL
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Fuel metering valve is blocked.
n N1 indication and Torque indication may not be available.
Following functions of the respective engine are inoperative:
NOTE
2. Affected engine
NOTE
When the OAT is below 10_C, adjust N1 to 77% ($ 2%) instead of 80%.
WARNING OPERATE THE TWIST GRIP WITH GREAT CARE AND AVOID QUICK TWIST
GRIP ROTATIONS.
HOLD MIN. 10% TORQUE ON THE NORMAL ENGINE TO MAINTAIN
AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF VARIABLE NRO IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 7 / FIG 7-17.
CAUTION
NOTE
3 - 22
If the flight situation requires maximum engine power, the power setting of the
affected engine may be increased. However, rotor speed and engine
parameters shall be observed closely. Do not exceed the N1 / torque value of
the normal engine and the AEO limits.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 23
FLI DEGR
or
(System I)
FLI DEGR
(System II)
Conditions/Indications
Loss of one engine parameter.
1. Do not try to match needles when different parameters are designated as first
limit
CAUTION
3 - 24
If nN1 failed, N1 digital value will be underlined according to the following table:
YELLOW underlining
RED underlining
AEO
96%N1<96.9%
N196.9%
OEI
98.4% N1<101%
N1101%
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
FLI FAIL
FLI FAIL
or
(System I)
(System II)
Conditions/Indications
Loss of two (TRQ, nN1) out of three signals (nN1, TRQ, TOT) of the same engine.
the parameter designations is yellow (nN1 symbol will be displayed above the N1
digital value, N1 will be underlined according to fixed values)
NOTE
If the cautions FLI FAIL and FADEC FAIL appear simultaneously, refer to
FADEC FAIL procedure.
Procedure
1. Do not try to trim engines
CAUTION
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F FILT CT
or
(SYSTEM I)
F FILT CT
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
CAUTION
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 25
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F PUMP AFT
F PUMP FWD
and
(MISC)
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of fuel transfer pumps, or dry run.
Procedure
1. Fuel quantity indication of main tank/supply
tanks (CAD)
Check
Check ON
Check in
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F PUMP AFT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of aft fuel transfer pump, or dry run.
Procedure
1. Fuel level in the main tank
Check
If main tank fuel quantity is sufficient to keep both fuel pumps wet:
2. FUEL PUMP XFER-A sw
Check ON
Check in
OFF
OFF
NOTE D Each fuel transfer pump is capable of feeding more fuel than both engines will
consume.
D In hover flight conditions the unusable fuel can be up to 71 kg. The quantity of
unusable fuel can be reduced to 7.5 kg when flying with 80 KIAS or more.
3 - 26
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F PUMP FWD
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of forward fuel transfer pump, or dry run.
Procedure
1. Fuel level in the main tank
Check
If main tank fuel quantity is sufficient to keep both fuel pumps wet:
2. FUEL PUMP XFER-F sw
Check ON
Check in
OFF
OFF
NOTE D Each fuel transfer pump is capable of feeding more fuel than both engines will
consume.
D In forward flight conditions the unusable fuel can be up to 59 kg. The quantity
of unusable fuel can be reduced to 3.6 kg when flying with 80 KIAS or less.
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F QTY DEGR
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of one main tank sensor.
CAUTION
Procedure
Set pitch attitude between 0 and +/1 before reading fuel quantity, then calculate
remaining flight endurance in accordance with that degraded fuel quantity indication.
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 27
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F QTY FAIL
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of the fuel quantity indication system.
CAUTION
Procedure
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
CAUTION INDICATIONS
FUEL
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
NOTE D For helicopters with 680 liters fuel tank:
The fuel quantities of the supply tanks begin to decrease. Caution appears
when fuel quantity is approx. 40 kg (tank 1) or 35 kg (tank 2).
D For helicopters with 710 liters fuel tank:
The fuel quantities of the supply tanks begin to decrease. Caution appears
when fuel quantity is approx. 36 kg/45 ltr (tank 1) or 32kg/40 ltr (tank 2).
Procedure
1. Fuel quantity indication of main tank/supply
tanks (CAD)
Check
Check ON
Check OFF
3 - 28
CAUTION INDICATIONS
FUEL FILT
FUEL FILT
and / or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Engine fuel filter(s) contaminated.
Procedure
One caution indication:
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
NOTE
CAUTION
CAUTION INDICATIONS
FUEL PRESS
or
(SYSTEM I)
FUEL PRESS
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Engine fuel pump pressure low.
NOTE
Caution FUEL PRESS may stay on when Prime Pump I/II selected on and
engine is not running.
Procedure
1. FUEL PRIME PUMP sw
(affected engine)
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 29
CAUTION INDICATIONS
FUEL VALVE
or
(SYSTEM I)
FUEL VALVE
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Fuel valve is in a position other than commanded.
NOTE
A FUEL VALVE caution indication coming on for a short time while valve is in
transition from open to closed position, or vice versa, indicates normal operation.
Procedure
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
NOTE
CAUTION INDICATIONS
F VALVE CL
(SYSTEM I)
or
F VALVE CL
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Fuel valve is in closed position.
The respective ACTIVE light on the EMER OFF pb panel (left/right side of the warning
panel) will illuminate.
NOTE
The F VALVE CL caution indication will come on after pushing the respective
EMER OFF pb marked FIRE.
Procedure
None
NOTE
3 - 30
Before starting the engines, check that respective EMER OFF pb marked FIRE
is depressed and the ACTIVE light is off.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
GEN DISCON
or
(SYSTEM I)
GEN DISCON
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Respective generator has failed or is disconnected from the power distribution system
CAUTION
Procedure
1. Affected GEN sw
OFF
Check
If battery is discharged:
3. Electrical consumers
NOTE
One generator alone will provide sufficient power for normal services.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 31
CAUTION INDICATIONS
GEN DISCON
GEN DISCON
and
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Both generators have failed or are disconnected from the power distribution system.
CAUTION
Procedure
1. Both GEN sw
NOTE
OFF
2. Electrical consumers
3. SHED BUS sw
EMER ON if necessary
Check
below 62 Amps during landing
below 51 Amps during cruise
3 - 32
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
GEN OVHT
GEN OVHT
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Temperature of generator high.
Procedure
1. Affected GEN switch
OFF
Establish
3. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
EFFECTIVITY
CAUTION INDICATIONS
HTG OVTEMP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
The temperature in the duct system or the cabin is exceeded by a certain amount.
OFF
Turn on
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
OFF
3 - 33
EFFECTIVITY
CAUTION INDICATIONS
HTG OVTEMP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
The temperature in the duct system or the cabin is exceeded by a certain amount.
OFF
NORM
EFFECTIVITY
3 - 34
OFF
All
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
HYD PRESS
or
(SYSTEM I)
HYD PRESS
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Pressure loss in the respective system, the other system retains power.
WARNING D DO NOT OPERATE HYD TEST SWITCH IN FLIGHT.
D EXTENDED FLIGHT WITH FAILED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SHOULD BE
AVOIDED. ADDITIONAL LOSS OF THE SECOND HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM WOULD RENDER THE HELICOPTER UNCONTROLLABLE.
CAUTION
Procedure
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
IDLE
or
(SYSTEM I)
IDLE
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
None
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 35
CAUTION INDICATIONS
INP FAIL
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
WARNING
Procedure
1. Do not start engines
2. Maintenance action required
CAUTION INDICATIONS
OVSP
or
(SYSTEM I)
OVSP
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Overspeed protection system failure.
Procedure
F ON GROUND
3 - 36
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
OVSP
or
in conjunction with
OVSP
in conjunction with
or
ENG FAIL
(SYSTEM I)
ENG FAIL
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
The affected engine will be shut off automatically due to an engine overspeed event.
Procedure
Proceed as for ENG FAIL caution
CAUTION INDICATIONS
P0 MISCMP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
A discrepancy of P0 engine SYS 1 or 2 w 20 mbar is detected. nN1 calculation of
engine SYS 1 or 2 could be affected.
Procedure
If nN1 is the limiting parameter of both engines:
1. Do not trim the engines.
2. Highest nN1 has to be respected.
3. Avoid using maximum power and perform power variation slowly.
4. LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 37
CAUTION INDICATIONS
PITOT HTR
PITOT HTR
and / or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Pitot tube heater pilot/copilot / static port heater pilot/copilot is switched off or has failed.
Procedure
1. PIT/STATIC HTR PILOT switch
If switch is in ON position:
2. Altitude indicator
Check
3. IAS
Check
CAUTION INDICATIONS
PRIME PUMP
and / or
(SYSTEM I)
PRIME PUMP
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Prime pump(s) switched ON.
Procedure
None (normal operation during starting engines)
NOTE
3 - 38
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
REDUND
REDUND
or / and
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
FADEC REDUND indicates loss of redundancy or failure with no effect on fuel control
system.
Procedure
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
NOTE D Perform appropriate logbook entry. Maintenance action is required.
D If on ground during pre-start check, both REDUND caution indications
(sys I and sys II) appear and remain, do not start engines. Maintenance action
is required.
CAUTION INDICATIONS
SHED EMER
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Set to NORM
3 - 39
CAUTION INDICATIONS
STARTER
or
(SYSTEM I)
STARTER
(SYSTEM II)
F ON GROUND
Conditions/Indications
If STARTER caution indication remains on after reaching IDLE speed a relay blockage is
evident.
NOTE
Procedure
1. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
F IN FLIGHT
Procedure
1. Affected GEN sw
OFF
2. STARTER caution
Check off
3. Electrical load
Check
4. Electrical consumption
Pull
After landing:
6. Shutdown affected engine with twist grip
3 - 40
Perform;
to
avoid
overtemperature
engine
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
T1 MISCMP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
A discrepancy of T1 engine SYS 1 and 2 w 20_C is detected. nN1 calculation of engine
SYS 1 and 2 could be affected.
Procedure
If nN1 is the limiting parameter of both engines:
1. Do not trim the engines.
2. Highest nN1 has to be respected.
3. Avoid using maximum power and perform power variation slowly.
4. LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
CAUTION INDICATIONS
TRGB CHIP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Metal particles detected in the tailrotor gearbox.
Procedure
LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 41
CAUTION INDICATIONS
TRGB CHP CT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
TRGB CHIP CAUTION IS NOT AVAILABLE.
CAUTION
Procedure
CAUTION INDICATIONS
TWIST GRIP
TWIST GRIP
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
Respective engine TWIST GRIP is not in the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE
Procedure
1. Respective engine TWIST GRIP
CAUTION INDICATIONS
VEMD FAN
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Failure of VEMD fan has been detected during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST.
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
3 - 42
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
XMSN CHIP
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Metal particles detected in the main transmission.
Procedure
1. XMSN oil pressure
CAUTION INDICATIONS
XMSN CHP CT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
CAUTION
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 43
CAUTION INDICATIONS
XMSN OIL P
XMSN OIL P
or
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
Conditions/Indications
XMSN oil pressure in respective pump system is below minimum.
Procedure
1. XMSN oil pressure indicator
CAUTION INDICATIONS
XMSN OIL T
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Transmission oil temperature above maximum.
Procedure
1. XMSN oil temperature and oil pressure in- Check
dication
If indications are within limits:
2. LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
If indications are out of limits:
2. Power
3 - 44
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
CAUTION INDICATIONS
XMSN OT CT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Test of cables and connectors to the sensor failed during CPDS EXTERNAL TEST
CAUTION
Procedure
Do not start engines. Maintenance action required.
CAUTION INDICATIONS
YAW SAS
(OPTIONAL)
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Press
If still inoperative:
3. SAS DCPL pushbutton
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Press
3 - 45
CPDS MALFUNCTIONS
3.3
CPDS MALFUNCTIONS
3.3.1
LANE 1 FAILED and PRESS OFF1 appears on the lower VEMD screen
FLI 1 DEGR appears on CAD and lower left side of the FLI Page on the lower
VEMD
NOTE
Detected overlimits or cautions that are not visible in the current display status
will be indicated in the message zone of the FLI.
List of possible messages:
CAUTION DETECTED
VEH PARAM OVER LIMIT
GEN PARAM OVER LIMIT
BAT PARAM OVER LIMIT
DC VOLT PARAM OVER LIMIT
FUEL PARAM OVER LIMIT
Procedure
1. OFF 1 button on the VEMD
NOTE
Press
Pressing the OFF 1 button removes power from the faulty lane 1. The FLI
appears automatically on the lower VEMD screen and replaces the ELEC/VEH
page. The ELEC/VEH page may be displayed on the CAD screen by pushing
the SCROLL button on the VEMD. Pressing again the SCROLL button causes
the CAD screen to return to the standard CAU/FUEL page display. In case of
loss of SCROLL button, press RESET button on VEMD to go back to default
page.
3 - 46
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3.3.2
LANE 2 FAILED and PRESS OFF 2 appears on the upper VEMD screen
FLI 2 DEGR appears on CAD and lower right side of the FLI Page on the upper
VEMD
NOTE
Detected overlimits or cautions that are not visible in the current display status
will be indicated in the message zone of the FLI.
List of possible messages:
CAUTION DETECTED
VEH PARAM OVER LIMIT
GEN PARAM OVER LIMIT
BAT PARAM OVER LIMIT
DC VOLT PARAM OVER LIMIT
FUEL PARAM OVER LIMIT
Procedure
1. OFF 2 button on the VEMD
NOTE
Press
Pressing the OFF 2 button removes power from the faulty lane 2. The
ELEC/VEH page may be displayed on the CAD screen by pushing the SCROLL
button on the VEMD. Pressing again the SCROLL button causes the CAD
screen to return to the standard CAU/FUEL page display. In case of loss of
SCROLL button, press RESET button on VEMD to go back to default page.
3 - 47
3.3.3
CAD FAILED and PRESS OFF appears on the FLI (message zone)
FLI 1 DEGR and FLI 2 DEGR appear on lower left/right side of the FLI page on the
upper VEMD
NOTE
Detected overlimits or cautions that are not visible in the current display status
will be indicated in the message zone of the FLI.
List of possible messages:
CAUTION DETECTED
VEH PARAM OVER LIMIT
GEN PARAM OVER LIMIT
BAT PARAM OVER LIMIT
DC VOLT PARAM OVER LIMIT
FUEL PARAM OVER LIMIT
MISC
SYSTEM II
ENG CHIP
XMSN CHIP
ENG CHIP
FADEC FAIL
T1 MISCMP
FADEC FAIL
FLI FAIL
P0 MISCMP
FLI FAIL
FLI DEGR
FLI DEGR
IDLE
IDLE
ENG MANUAL
ENG MANUAL
TWIST GRIP
TWIST GRIP
DEGRADE
DEGRADE
ENG FAIL
ENG FAIL
HYD PRESS
HYD PRESS
ENG EXCEED
ENG EXCEED
3 - 48
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Procedure
1. OFF button on the CAD
NOTE
Press
Pressing the OFF button removes power from the faulty lane. The CAU/FUEL
page takes priority over the ELEC/VEH page and appears automatically on the
lower VEMD screen. The ELEC/VEH page may be reselected on the lower
VEMD screen by pushing the SCROLL button on the VEMD. Pressing twice
causes SYSTEM STATUS page to appear. To return to the CAU/FUEL page,
press the SCROLL button again. In case of loss of SCROLL button, press
RESET button on VEMD to go back to default page.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 49
3.3.4
CAUTION D AFTER DOUBLE VEMD LANE FAILURE THE AVAILABLE CAUTION INDICATION ON THE CAD SCREEN IS DEGRADED TO THE FOLLOWING:
MISC
SYSTEM I
SYSTEM II
ENG FAIL
TRGB CHIP
ENG FAIL
ENG OIL P
XMSN OIL T
ENG OIL P
FADEC FAIL
F QTY DEGR
FADEC FAIL
FUEL PRESS
DECOUPLE
FUEL PRESS
FUEL FILT
F PUMP FWD
FUEL FILT
ENG O FILT
F PUMP AFT
ENG O FILT
FUEL VALVE
BAT DISCON
FUEL VALVE
F VALVE CL
EXT POWER
F VALVE CL
PRIME PUMP
SHED EMER
PRIME PUMP
XMSN OIL P
F QTY FAIL
XMSN OIL P
GEN OVHT
ACTUATION*
GEN OVHT
GEN DISCON
EPU DOOR
GEN DISCON
FIRE EXT
YAW SAS*
FIRE EXT
FIRE E TST
ICE DETECT*
FIRE E TST
BUSTIE OPN
P DAMPER*
BUSTIE OPN
STARTER
AUTOPILOT*
STARTER
3 - 50
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3.4.1
Affected engine:
2. Landing attitude
Establish
3. Collective lever
NOTE
Below 95% rotor RPM, the torque could increase from 128% up to 133%.
After landing:
4. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 51
Affected engine:
Increase if possible
2. Collective lever
F FORCED LANDING
3. Landing attitude
Establish
4. Collective lever
NOTE
Below 95% rotor RPM, the torque could increase from 128% up to 133%.
After landing:
5. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
3. Airspeed
and simultaneously
4. Collective lever
6. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
3 - 52
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Affected engine:
F REJECTED TAKEOFF
2. Landing attitude
Establish
3. Collective lever
NOTE
Below 95% rotor RPM, the torque could increase from 128% up to 133%.
After landing:
4. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
2. Collective lever
3. Airspeed
5. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 53
Affected engine:
Establish
2. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
3 - 54
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
check off
2. Airspeed
65 KIAS (VY)
3. Shallow approach
Establish
40 KIAS
5. Rate of descent
TOUCHDOWN:
6. Airspeed
7. Landing attitude
Establish
8. Collective lever
NOTE
Below 95% rotor RPM, the torque could increase from 128% up to 133%.
CAUTION
AFTER LANDING:
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
9. Collective lever
Lower slowly
3 - 55
the collective lever is adjusted to maintain the normal engine within the
OEI limits
D In case of a single engine failure/ emergency shutdown, the bleed air heating
will be switched off automatically. Depending on the power margin of the
normal engine, the bleed air heating may be re-engaged by selecting heater
switch position EMER.
D If CAD message BLEED AIR remains on after single engine failure, the
system must be switched off manually. Depending on the power margin of the
normal engine, the bleed air heating may be re-engaged.
Procedure
1. ENG MAIN sw (affected engine)
CAUTION
NOTE
3 - 56
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Inflight Restart
NOTE
CAUTION
Procedure
1. Collective lever
3. Electrical consumption
Reduce
4. ENG MAIN sw
Check OFF
5. FADEC sw
Check ON
Check NORM
ON
N position
EFFECTIVITY
For F34, F35, F44 and JETA, when fuel temperature is below 30_C
and PA > 10000ft (refer to Sect. 2, Para. 2.14.4):
9. ENG MAIN sw
NOTE
EFFECTIVITY
Start will occur when N1 is dropped below 17%. In the case of switching on at
higher N1 the engine will start automatically when N1 has decreased below 17%.
All
OFF
As required
Check disappeared
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Perform
3 - 57
NRO decrease
Affected engine:
Establish
2. Affected engine
Identify
Perform
3 - 58
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Affected engine:
Torque, N1 and TOT increase and engine might be automatically shutoff by the
overspeed protection system, if N2 exceeds limitation.
Normal engine:
N2 decrease
Procedure
1. Collective lever
2. Affected engine
Identify
4. Collective lever
MAN
7. Collective lever
Readjust
as
necessary
without changing TWIST GRIP
position
WARNING OPERATE THE TWIST GRIP WITH GREAT CARE AND AVOID QUICK TWIST
GRIP ROTATIONS.
HOLD MIN. 10% TORQUE ON THE NORMAL ENGINE TO MAINTAIN
AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF VARIABLE NRO IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 7 / FIG 7-17
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 59
Increase if possible
Identify
Establish
Ground Idle
3 - 60
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
2. Landing attitude
Establish
3. Collective lever
Raise as necessary to
cushion landing
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Lower rapidly
3 - 61
Perform
OFF
2. Both FADEC sw
OFF
OFF
4. BAT MSTR sw
OFF
F IN FLIGHT
OFF
2. Both FADEC sw
OFF
NOTE
3 - 62
Autorotation
Procedure
1. Collective lever
2. Airspeed
75 KIAS recommended
NOTE
Perform
Establish
TOUCHDOWN:
5. Landing attitude
Establish
6. Heading
Maintain
7. Collective lever
AFTER TOUCHDOWN:
8. Collective lever
9. Cyclic stick
OFF
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 63
3.5.1
Cabin Fire
Conditions/Indications
F ON GROUND
Perform
2. Passengers
Alert/Evacuate
3. Fire
Extinguish if possible
F IN FLIGHT
1. Airspeed
Reduce, if necessary
(65 KIAS recommended)
2. Passengers
Alert
OFF
4. Fire
Extinguish if possible
5. Fumes, smoke
6.
After landing:
7. Double engine emergency shutdown
3 - 64
Perform
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
F ON GROUND
1. Double engine emergency shutdown
Perform
2. Passengers
Alert/Evacuate
3. EPU, if connected
Disconnect
4. Fire
Extinguish if possible
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 65
OFF
Check on
4. BAT MSTR sw
OFF
OFF
Check on
NORM
Check off
9. Other GEN sw
OFF
Check on
OFF
3 - 66
3.6.1
Tail rotor failure in power-on flight is indicated by a yawing motion nose right; the yaw
rate depends on the aircraft power at the time of failure.
Procedure
Turn to minimum
and simultaneously:
2. Landing attitude
Establish
3. Collective lever
Apply as necessary
After landing:
4. Double engine emergency shutdown
Perform
1. Collective lever
Reduce immediately
Turn to minimum
If height permits:
3. Airspeed
Gain
4. Collective lever
After landing:
5. Double engine emergency shutdown
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
Perform
3 - 67
Tail Rotor Drive Failure / Fixed-pitch Tail Rotor Control Failure - Forward Flight
Conditions/Indications
Locked pedals
NOTE
The procedure will vary depending on flight conditions, power setting and mass
of the helicopter
Procedure
1. Collective lever
2. Airspeed
Select
NOTE D Surface of the landing area should be hard (e.g. concrete, asphalt) and flat.
D Crosswind from the left is advantageous
4. Shallow approach with nose left
Perform
If the airspeed can be reduced below 40 kts with the nose still pointing to the left:
5. Airspeed
6. Landing
Perform
If the nose direction changes from left to right at airspeeds higher than 40 kts:
5. Airspeed
6. Approach
NOTE
Headwind is advantageous
7. Autorotation
Perform
3 - 68
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3.7.1
Conditions/Indications
Unsymmetrical cyclic stick forces
Procedure
1. FTR pb on cyclic stick
3.7.2
Pull
NOTE
3.7.3
ALTERNATE SOURCE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
3 - 69
3.7.4
Conditions/Indications
NOTE
Procedure
1. HIGH NR mode
Check selected
2. NRO
Check
If NRO is 103% :
3. Continue Flight/Approach
If NRO remains nominal :
3. Continue Flight
NOTE
Avoid landing with right cross wind for gross masses above 2835 kg and up
to 2910 kg.
Conditions/Indications
NOTE
Procedure
1. HI NR pb
2. NRO
Check
If NRO is nominal :
3. Continue Flight
If NRO 103% :
3. Airspeed
4. Continue Flight
NOTE
3 - 70
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
4.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2
4.2.1
Flight Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2.2
4.3
PREFLIGHT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.3.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.3.2
Exterior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.3.3
Interior Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
4.4
4.4.1
PRE-TAKEOFF CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
4.6
TAKEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
4.7
PRE-LANDING CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
4.8
LANDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
4.9
ENGINE SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 29
4.10
4.11
4.11.1
4.11.2
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
4i
Page
4.12
EFFECTIVITY
4.12.1
Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
4.12.2
Deicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 32
4.12.3
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
4.12.4
EFFECTIVITY
4.12.5
Normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
4.12.6
Deicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
4.12.7
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34
4.12.8
EFFECTIVITY
All
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 4-1
4 ii
APPROVED
Rev. 11
SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
GENERAL
4.1
This Section contains instructions and recommended procedures which are peculiar to
the operation of this helicopter.
For definition of terms, abbreviations and symbols used in this Section refer to Section 1.
NOTE D For para. 4.3.2 Exterior Check and para. 4.3.3 Interior Check observe:
All steps/checks which are mandatory before each flight are marked with an
asterisk (L).
All other steps/checks in these two paras have only to be performed before the first
flight of the day or for aircraft on alert / on call status these items should be per
formed within a 24 hours cycle.
D From para. 4.4 to para. 4.10 all steps/checks are mandatory before each flight.
D All high intensity lights installed on the aircraft could cause injuries to eyes.
EFFECTIVITY
D
Switching off the BAT MSTR sw during flight will trigger a SETO self-test upon engine
shut down.
EFFECTIVITY
4.2
All
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE
EFFECTIVITY
4.2.1
All
Flight Planning
Refer to Section 5 to determine required fuel, airspeeds and power settings for takeoff,
climb, cruise, hovering and landing data necessary to accomplish the mission.
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
4-1
4.2.2
4.3
PREFLIGHT CHECK
4.3.1
General
The preflight check shall be accomplished in accordance with the Flight Manual.
The preflight check is not a detailed mechanical inspection, but essentially a visual check
of the helicopter for correct condition.
When unusual local conditions dictate, the extent and/or frequency of this check shall be
increased as necessary to promote safe operation.
NOTE D The following list contains only check items for the standard configuration.
D In addition to these items, check antennas and all installed optional equipment.
D Make certain that all relevant intermediate and special inspections in accordance with the Maintenance Manual have been complied with.
D For optional equipment check items, refer to the respective Flight Manual
Supplement or Maintenance Manual.
4.3.2
Exterior Check
The exterior check is laid out as a walk-around check, starting forward right at the pilots
door, proceeding clockwise to the tail boom, to the left hand side (including the upper
and lower areas of the helicopter) and is completed at the helicopter nose area.
NOTE D The helicopter shall be headed into the wind.
D The area around the helicopter should be clear of all foreign objects.
D To avoid excessive drain on the helicopter battery, particularly during cold
weather, all ground operations should be conducted using an external power
unit (EPU). Prior to EPU connection make sure that battery is connected.
D When the battery is used, the operation of electrical equipment should be kept
to a minimum.
4-2
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
EC135_FLH_0031_D
3
1.
Fuselage RH
4.
Cabin roof
2.
Rear structure
5.
Nose area
3.
Fuselage LH
Fig. 4-1
Check, complete
L Weight, CG
Check
Removed
Removed
Removed
Fuel tanks
L Equipment and cargo
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 7
Drained
Secured
For required checks of the installed Hand Fire Extinguisher(s) observe national
regulations and manufacturers safety advise.
4-3
ON
VEMD
VEMD
4-4
SHED BUS sw
CAD
OFF
SHED BUS sw
CAD
OFF
APPROVED
Rev. 8
EXTERIOR CHECK
Fuselage - RH:
Cockpit air intake
Clear
Pilot door
Condition, function
Check, OFF
Sliding door
Condition, function
Condition
Drain port
Clear
Fuselage underside
Condition, no leakage
Condition
Condition
Clear
Condition
Clear
Condition
Sliding door
Check closed
OAT-Sensor
Condition, clear
Check clear
Oil cooler
Clear, condition
Condition
Sight glass
Check in
Check
Generator intake
Clear
Clear
Closed, secured
Condition, no leakage,
no foreign objects
Oil level
Clear
Closed, locked
Check in
Clear
Closed, secured
4-5
Fuselage - RH (continued):
L Maintenance step
Avionic bay cooling vent
L EPU access
Check in
Clear
Circuit breaker in, door closed if
EPU not connected
Battery
Condition, connected
Clear
Clear
Condition
Condition, function
On board, condition
Avionic rack
Secured
Closed, secured
Condition
Rear Area:
L Tail boom - right side
Condition
Condition
Drain port(s)
Clear
Condition
Condition
Trimm Weight(s)
Fenestron structure
L Tail rotor blades
4-6
Condition
Condition, free play
Tail rotor
Check no dislocation
Condition, no cracks
Condition
Condition
Condition, no cracks
Condition
Stators
Condition
APPROVED
Rev. 8
L Tail gearbox
Condition, closed
Condition
Condition
Condition
Fuselage - LH:
L Static port(s) (2, if copilots system installed)
Clear
Condition
Clear
Condition, no leakage,
no foreign objects
Oil level
Clear
Closed, locked
Check in
Clear
Closed, secured
Transmission compartment
Check clear
Oil cooler
Clear, condition
Condition
Sight glass
Condition, no shift
Generator intake
Clear
Clear
Closed, secured
Condition
Condition, no shift
Condition
APPROVED
Rev. 8
Condition, no separation
4-7
Condition
Condition
Secured
Condition
Condition
Condition
Condition
No foreign objects
No foreign objects
Fuselage - LH (continued):
Deck cowlings
Condition
Condition
Condition
Clean
L Maintenance step
Fuel filler cap
L Fuel filler door
Closed
Closed, secured
Closed, locked
Condition
Clear
Condition
Fuselage underside
Condition, no leakage
Sliding door
Condition, function
If the optional precatch device is installed the door must be in fully closed position prior next opening. The pilot/crew has to instruct the passengers for safety
reasons.
Cockpit air intake
4-8
Clear
APPROVED
Rev. 10
Copilot door
Condition, function
Fastened, secured
Nose area:
Windshield, front and lower part
L Pitot tube(s) (2, if copilots system installed)
Condition
Nose windows
Condition
L Pedal areas
4.3.3
Condition, clean
No foreign objects
Landing lights
Condition
L Fuselage bottom
Condition
Interior Check
L Seats and pedals
L Safety belt
Fastened
L Pilot/Copilot door
If the optional precatch device is installed the door must be in fully closed position prior next opening.
L Overhead panel:
All circuit breakers
In
All switches
OFF or NORM
L Instrument panel:
Instruments
Check
Clock
All switches
OFF or NORM
STATIC TUBE
L Center console:
COM/NAV equipment
Check condition
L Collective lever:
All switches
Twist grips
NEUTRAL
Collective lever
Check locked
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4-9
4.4
4.4.1
CAUTION
Instrument panel:
BAT MSTR switch
NR/N2 instrument
GND PWR (or GND ON) sw(s) (if installed)
NOTE
Do not switch off CPDS during or after flight. However, if it has been switched off
even though, proceed as follows for a correct reactivation:
1. CAD OFF pb
Press
Press one after the other; several cautions may appear for a few
seconds.
CAD
NOTE
Reset
4 - 10
EXT/WARN
Warning panel
Headset
OFF
EXT/WARN
Warning panel
Headset
OFF
NOTE
To ensure that the engines are supplied enough fuel, prime pumps must be on
for at least 10 sec. before starting engines.
A-COLL light sw
ON
RED or WHT
Instrument panel:
1)
Check operative
Adjust as required
VEMD
Check quantity
NAV/COM
As required
Press
Cyclic stick
Centered
CAUTION
1)
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4 - 11
FADEC sw I then II
ON;
CAD
NOTE
If one of these cautions remain on, abort pre-start check. Maintenance action is
required.
Select
SYSTEM
STATUS
PAGE;
compare P0 between system
1 and 2, max. allowable difference is t 20 hPa
compare T1 between system
1 and 2, max. allowable difference is t 4_C
NOTE
4 - 12
If a bigger difference of T1s is indicated and the aircraft has been exposed to
the sun for an extended period repeat the test after engine start prior to takeoff.
APPROVED
Rev. 6
Rotor area
Clear
PERFORM
OF
THE
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4 - 13
OFF
Turn to SHUT-OFF
NOTE D If, for any reason, a starting attempt is discontinued, the entire starting sequence must be repeated from the beginning.
D In case of a repeated engine start, wait 30 seconds and perform a 15 second
engine ventilation (see para. 4.10).
Starting First Engine
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE D During engine start, if ignition does not take place before reaching N1 = 20%,
the engine will automatically interrupt the starting process and automatically
perform a restart when N1 has decreased to 9%. This may lead to 15 seconds starting time without pilots action for the first starting attempt. The starting time for the automatically restart has to be observed in accordance with
the abort startup procedure.
D Only one automatic restart will be performed.
D If the automatic restart is not successful, the abort start procedures shall be
applied.
EFFECTIVITY
All
NOTE D In case of operation under low OAT, observe oil limits, fuel limits and warm up
procedure as detailed in FLM.
D Either engine may be started first.
First Limit Indicator
NOTE
4 - 14
Check N2 70%
APPROVED
Rev. 8
HYDRAULIC Check:
CAUTION
HYD test sw
with pedals
HYD test sw
Check correct operation with small cyclic stick, collective lever and pedal movements.
EFFECTIVITY
Collective lever
EFFECTIVITY
1)
All
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
4 - 15
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE D During engine start, if ignition does not take place before reaching N1 = 20%,
the engine will automatically interrupt the starting process and automatically
perform a restart when N1 has decreased to 9%. This may lead to 15 seconds starting time without pilots action for the first starting attempt. The starting time for the automatically restart has to be observed in accordance with
the abort startup procedure.
D Only one automatic restart will be performed.
D If the automatic restart is not successful, the abort start procedures shall be
applied.
EFFECTIVITY
All
NOTE
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Avionics
Instruments
FLIGHT
NOTE
Due to start sequence the FLI needle of the second started engine can show
TOT start mode instead of torque. Switch this engine to FLIGHT position first.
4 - 16
Close
APPROVED
Rev. 8
Power Check
Perform power check as required (refer to Section 5).
YAW SAS Check
SAS DCPL push-button
Press
Check CAUTION indication:
YAW SAS
Monitor Mast Moment Indication, if installed, while performing small cyclic inputs.
STBY/HOR switch
CAD
NOTE
HOR BAT must at least momentarily remain illuminated to indicate that the
emergency battery is adequately charged. If HOR BAT on the CAD goes off immediately when the switch is moved in TEST position, the emergency battery is
probably incapable of providing power for 30 minutes in case of emergency.
STBY/HOR switch
ON
CAD
After 60 seconds:
Cage knob
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4 - 17
Bleed Air Heating check: (Before first flight, if the use of the heating system is intended.)
PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob
Pull
DEFOG
NORM
WARNING
EFFECTIVITY
MIN
EFFECTIVITY
All
HIGH NR advisory
Check on
NOTE
4 - 18
APPROVED
Rev. 10
4.4.2
NOTE
AFTER BAT MSTR SW IS SWITCHED ON, THE LOW ROTOR RPM AUDIO
TONE APPEARS. DO NOT PRESS THE RESET PB (CYCLIC STICK) UNTIL
THE END OF THE CPDS TEST. OTHERWISE THE INPUT FAIL CAUTION
LOGIC MAY BE CORRUPTED.
Standard preflight checks (according to para. 4.3) and the additional preflight
checks must be performed to prepare the helicopter for a subsequent quick start
(according to para. 4.4.2.2).
Instrument panel:
BAT MSTR switch
NR/N2 instrument
OFF
CAD
Reset
EXT/WARN
Warning panel
Headset
OFF
EXT/WARN
Warning panel
Headset
OFF
APPROVED
Rev. 11
4 - 19
SHED BUS
EMER
NOTE
Cage knob
STBY/HOR switch
CAD
HOR BAT must at least momentarily remain illuminated to indicate that the
emergency battery is adequately charged. If HOR BAT on the CAD goes off immediately when the switch is moved in TEST position, the emergency battery is
probably incapable of providing power for 30 minutes in case of emergency.
STBY/HOR switch
ON
CAD
After 60 seconds:
Cage knob
Instrument panel:
1)
Check operative
Adjust as required
VEMD
Check quantity
Press
Cyclic stick
Centered
FADEC sw I then II
ON;
Check following CAUTION
indications on CAD coming up
for a few seconds and disappear
(SYS 1/2):
- TRAINING
- ENG MANUAL
- DEGRADE
- REDUND
- ENG EXCEED
- OVSP
1)
4 - 20
Select
SYSTEM
STATUS
PAGE;
compare P0 between system
1 and 2, max. allowable difference is t 20hPa
compare T1 between system
1 and 2, max. allowable difference is t 4_C
NOTE
If a bigger difference of T1s is indicated and the aircraft has been exposed to
the sun for an extended period repeat the test after engine start prior to takeoff.
Avionic checks:
Avionic Master switch(es)
ON
ON
Avionics
Instruments
NAV/COM
As required
Test
Test
Press,
check CAUTION indication:
YAW SAS
Bleed Air Heating check: (Before first flight, if the use of the heating system is intended.)
PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob
Pull
DEFOG
EMER
EFFECTIVITY
APPROVED
Rev. 11
NORM
4 - 21
EFFECTIVITY
EFFECTIVITY
MIN
All
Optional Equipment
OFF
Static inverters
OFF
Set
Landing lights
Check / set
Power OFF:
4 - 22
SHED BUS
FADEC sw I then II
OFF
OFF
Helicopter
APPROVED
Rev. 11
NOTE
In case of operation under low OAT, observe oil limits, fuel limits and warm up procedure as detailed in FLM.
Safety belt
Fastened
If the optional precatch device is installed the door must be in fully closed position prior next opening.
Fuel PRIME pumps (1 and 2)
A-COLL light sw
RED or WHT
CAUTION
FADEC sw I then II
ON
VEMD
Starting engines
NOTE
Fire guard
Rotor area
Clear
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4 - 23
FLIGHT,
clock
simultaneously
start
Only one engine will begin starting cycle. After reaching N1 50% (first engine
starter drop out), the second engine will begin its starting cycle automatically.
Monitor:
- N1 increase
- TOT rise ( 720 _C);
note that FLI needle moves
not until 350 _C.
- Engine oil pressure increase
- N2 and NRO increase
N1
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
HYDRAULIC Check:
CAUTION
HYD test sw
with pedals
HYD test sw
1)
4 - 24
NOTE
EFFECTIVITY
Check correct operation with small cyclic stick, collective lever and pedal movements.
For helicopters with S/N 1225 and subsequent or after SB EC13531081
Collective lever
EFFECTIVITY
All
Avionics
Instruments
System Checks:
Cyclic trim system
NOTE
Optional Equipment
Close
HIGH NR advisory
Check on
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
4 - 25
4.5
PRE-TAKEOFF CHECK
CAUTION
CHECK THAT THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE INTERCOM VOLUME REGULATOR GUARANTEES AUDIBLE SIGNALS.
NRO / N2
All doors
Closed
Cabin
Check secured
Cyclic stick
Collective lever
CAUTION
NOTE
4 - 26
Check 97%,
If gross mass > 2835 kg:
In case of operation under low OAT condition observe engine oil temperature
limits and warm up procedure as stated in section 2 para. 2.15.
APPROVED
Rev. 11
4.6
TAKEOFF
Collective
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE
EFFECTIVITY
Check if starting triangles disappeared, if not, perform small input ( 30% torque)
Hover flight
Perform
NR/N2 instrument
Check 100%
If gross mass > 2835 kg:
Check 103%
FLI needles
Check
APPROVED
Rev. 12.1
4 - 27
4.7
PRE-LANDING CHECK
All instruments
Check
Check
Cabin
Check secured
4.8
LANDING
CAUTION
4 - 28
Before touchdown
Touchdown
Cyclic stick
Centered
Collective lever
Lock
APPROVED
Rev. 11
4.9
ENGINE SHUTDOWN
ENG I / II main switches
IDLE
Clock
Start
Inverter sw(s)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Cyclic stick
Centered
After 30 seconds:
ENG I/II main switches
OFF
Engine parameters
Monitor
Turn to SHUT-OFF
IF AFTER ENGINE SHUTDOWN A FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT DUE TO UNDRAINED/RESIDUAL FUEL IS DETECTED (SMOKE
OBSERVED EXITING EXHAUST PIPE), AN ENGINE VENTILATION (DRY
CRANK) SHALL BE PERFORMED.
OFF
VEMD
OFF
APPROVED
Rev. 9
4 - 29
4.10
OFF
When N1 < 10% and 30 seconds have elapsed since start abort to allow proper fuel
drainage:
VENT switch
VENT position, max. 15 sec.
4 - 30
APPROVED
Rev. 12
4.11
4.11.1
4.11.2
In order to minimize the reaction time in case of emergency, the manual mode
may be entered only by turning the respective twist grip out of the neutral position (refer to section 3).
NORM;
Check off
Turn gradually
position
Check off
to
NEUTRAL
APPROVED
Rev. 7
4 - 31
4.12
EFFECTIVITY
4.12.1
Normal operation
PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob
Set as required
Turn towards MAX as far as desired; check if BLEED AIR advisory comes on
Set as required
Set as required
NOTE
4.12.2
In case of blower failure check c/b VENT SYST POWER (overhead panel) engaged. For blower reactivation pull and push c/b VENT SYST CONTROL (overhead panel).
If c/b VENT SYST POWER is engaged check c/b VENT PWR (c/bpanel 22VE,
located in the baggage compartment RHside). This check is only possible on
ground. For blower reactivation pull and push c/b VENT SYST CONTROL (overhead panel).
Deicing
In case of iced windows proceed as follows:
PULL for AIR knob
Pull
Pull
Pull
4 - 32
DEFOG
Turn to MAX
Close
Close
APPROVED
Rev. 10
4.12.3
Defogging
In case of fogged windows proceed as follows:
PULL for AIR knob
Pull
Pull
Pull
DEFOG
Turn to MAX
Turn to MAX
Close
Close
NOTE
4.12.4
Additionally open the sliding window (if installed) for more fresh air.
EFFECTIVITY
4.12.5
Normal operation
PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob
Set as required
BLD HTG sw
Set as required
Set as required
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 10
In case of blower failure check c/b VENT SYST POWER (overhead panel) engaged. For blower reactivation pull and push c/b VENT SYST CONTROL (overhead panel).
If c/b VENT SYST POWER is engaged check c/b VENT PWR (c/bpanel 22VE,
located in the baggage compartment RHside). This check is only possible on
ground. For blower reactivation pull and push c/b VENT SYST CONTROL (overhead panel).
4 - 33
4.12.6
Deicing
PULL for AIR knob
Pull
Pull
Pull
DEFOG
4.12.7
BLD HTG sw
Turn to MAX
Close
Close
Defogging
In case of fogged windows proceed as follows:
PULL for AIR knob
Pull
Pull
Pull
DEFOG
Turn to MAX
BLD HTG sw
Turn to MAX
Close
Close
NOTE
4.12.8
Additionally open the sliding window (if installed) for more fresh air.
EFFECTIVITY
4 - 34
All
APPROVED
Rev. 9
SECTION 7
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
7.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.2
COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.2.1
7.2.1.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Power Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel and Consoles (Fig. 7-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7.3.1
7.3.2
YAW SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Cyclic Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11
7.3.3
Collective lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
7.3.3.1 Twist grips (version I and version II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Engine Oil System (Fig. 7-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Engine Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
7.4.3.1
7.4.3.2
7.4.3.3
7.4.3.4
FADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine control panel with SETO warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual engine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 19
7 - 21
7 - 21
7 - 22
7.4.3.5
7.4.3.6
7.4.3.7
7.4.3.8
Engine ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N2 ADJUST rheostat (see Fig. 7-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 sec./ 2min. topping selection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine overspeed protection system (OVSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 - 23
7 - 23
7 - 23
7 - 23
7.5
HIGH NR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
7.6
7.6.1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
7.6.2
7.6.3
Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Annunciators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
Alternative installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Bleed air installation schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7i
Page
7.8
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
7.8.1
Main Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.9
ROTOR SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
7.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 40
7.11.1
7.12
7.13
7.13.1
7.14
7.15
7.15.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46
7.15.2
7ii
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
Fig. 7-1
Fig. 7-2
Fig. 7-3
Fig. 7-4
Fig. 7-5
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-6
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-7
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-8
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-9
Fig. 7-10
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-11
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-12
EFFECTIVITY
All
Fig. 7-18
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7iii
Page
Fig. 7-21
Fig. 7-22
Fig. 7-23
Fig. 7-24
Fig. 7-25
Fig. 7-26
Fig. 7-27
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-28
EFFECTIVITY
Fig. 7-29
EFFECTIVITY
7iv
All
Fig. 7-30
Fig. 7-31
Fig. 7-32
Fig. 7-33
Fig. 7-34
Fig. 7-35
Fig. 7-36
Fig. 7-37
Fig. 7-38
Fig. 7-39
Fig. 7-40
Fig. 7-41
Fig. 7-42
Fig. 7-43
Fig. 7-44
Fig. 7-45
Fig. 7-46
Fig. 7-47
Fig. 7-48
Fig. 7-49
FLI page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 53
Fig. 7-50
LIMIT sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 55
Fig. 7-51
Fig. 7-52
Fig. 7-53
Fig. 7-54
Page
Fig. 7-55
Fig. 7-56
Fig. 7-57
CAU/FUEL page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
Fig. 7-58
Fig. 7-59
Fig. 7-60
Fig. 7-61
Fig. 7-62
CAU/BACKUP page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Fig. 7-63
Fig. 7-64
Degraded caution indication in case of CAD and one VEMD lane off . 7 - 76
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
SECTION 7
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
7.1
GENERAL
This section contains information that applies specifically to EC 135 T2+ helicopters with
Central Panel Display System installed .
7.2
COCKPIT ARRANGEMENT
13
2
3
5
DH
T
S
T
DH
BARO
EXT
CRS
NAV
PFD
SOURCE
ND
S
T
D
POS
T
S
T
BARO
EXT
CRS
NAV
PFD
SOURCE
ND
S
T
D
POS
12
EC135_FLH_0117_R
11
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
Overhead console
Rotor brake lever
Cockpit light
Instrument panel
Cyclic stick
6 Center post
7 Collective lever
8 Collective lever friction brake
Fig. 7-1
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 11
9 Fire extinguisher
10 Ventilation system
control lever
11 Center console
12 Slant console
13 Compass
7-1
7.2.1
Overhead Console
The overhead console is divided in several sections
to provide easy access to the respective
circuit breaker or switches.
1
3
4
RESET
OVSP I OVSP II
ENG I
O
F
F
M
A
X
ENG II
EC135_WAH_0068_D
1
2
3
4
Bus system I
Bus system II
Bus control switches
AC Bus II (optional)
Fig. 7-2
7-2
5
6
7
8
Overhead panel
Essential buses
Shedding buses
AC Bus I (optional)
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 9
1
RESET
OVSP I OVSP II
ENG I
O
F
F
M
A
X
3
ENG II
EC135_FLH_0056_D
1 Test switches
2 Avionic switches
3 Heating, ventilation, wiper switches
and rheostat
Fig. 7-3
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 9
4
5
6
7
7-3
7.2.2
EC135_FLH_0084_R
The high power buses are accessible from inside of the cargo compartment (see
Fig. 7-4).
Fig. 7-4
7-4
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 9
7.2.3
10
8
7
DH
T
S
T
NAV
SOURCE
PFD
S
T
D
ND
CRS
DH
BARO
EXT
POS
T
S
T
BARO
EXT
NAV
SOURCE
PFD
S
T
D
ND
CRS
POS
1
2
3
4
CAD
Warning panel
Analog instruments (e.g. NR/N2)
Flight control displays pilot
(PFD & ND)
5 VEMD
Fig. 7-5
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 9
6 NMS
7 DC power/engine control panel
8 Flight control displays copilot
(PFD & ND)
9 Extended instrumemt panel (optional)
10 Standard instrument panel
7-5
AP
A. TRIM
EC135_WAH_0062_D
10
11
7-6
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
EFFECTIVITY
For helicopters with S/N 926 to S/N 1224 and before SB EC13531081
5
CHECK
ENG
AP
A. TRIM
EC135_WAH_0062_D
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
EFFECTIVITY
5
CHECK
ENG
AP
A. TRIM
EC135_WAH_0062_D
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7-7
NOTE
7-8
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.3
10
7
5
EC135_FLH_0062_R
1
2
3
4
5
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
6
7
8
9
10
Ballbearing control
Attachment ballbearing cable
Yaw actuator
Tail rotor input lever
Tail rotor actuator
7-9
7.3.1
YAW SAS
The yaw stability augmentation system (Yaw SAS) introduces limited authority control
inputs into the tail rotor control.
The Yaw SAS, automatically activated during the start procedures, operates in series
with the command inputs of the pilot on the non-boosted section ot the tail rotor control. It
operates by converting electrical signals from the yaw rate sensor (fibre optical gyro) into
control inputs for the tail rotor via the yaw actuator and the yaw hydraulic.
In case of power supply cut-off or a failure/malfunction of the fibre optical gyro or the
yaw actuator a YAW SAS caution will be displayed on the CAD. In this case the pilot
should disengage the Yaw SAS by pressing the SAS DCPL switch.
7 - 10
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.3.2
Cyclic Stick
6
5
7
4
8
3
2
ICS RADIO
Intercommunication system
Trim release
ATT TRIM
Attitude trimming
SAS DCPL
INACTIV
Spare
CDS/AUDIO RES
NOTE
Instead of the new cyclic stick centering device (without locking possibility) in
some H/C s a cyclic stick locking device is installed (observe ASB EC
13567A015). This locking device has an preset breaking point. It provides the
possibility to override the locking device in case of emergency by a strong jerky
forceaft movement of the cyclic stick (e.g. unintended locked cyclic stick in
takeoff situation).
Fig. 7-10
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 11
7.3.3
Collective lever
For helicopters up to S/N 0999
EFFECTIVITY
10
9
8
ON
O
F
F
MIR
L
D
G
L
T
RETR
1
L
T
M
I
R
WIPER
ENG TRIM
WIPER
Wiper switch
GA
LT/ MIR
TOPPING
Topping pushbutton provides activation of the respective 30 seconds/ 2 minutes power limitations.
LDG LT MIR
10
LDG LT FIX
7 - 12
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
EFFECTIVITY
10
MIRROR
CUT
CABLE
FILL
FLOATS
S
/
L
L
T
H
I
S
L
1
I
R
/
V
I
S
S/LON
LT
L
T
FWD
EC135_FLH_0417_R
GA
OFF
LAND
S/LLT
AFT
L
D
G
FOCUS
HISL
WIPER
+L
R+
ENG TRIM
ENG TRIM
WIPER (opt.)
Wiper switch
GA (opt.)
TOPPING
Topping pushbutton provides activation of the respective 30 seconds/ 2 minutes power limitations.
MIRROR / S/LLT /
HISL (opt)
10
Fig. 7-12
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 13
CAUTION
7 - 14
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
2
5
2
5
Fig. 7-13
NOTE
The mechanical stop towards MAX can be overridden by pulling the emergency safety
latch (full manual mode control).
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 15
Flight direction
1
Fig. 7-14
7 - 16
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.4
7.4.1
Engines
Two Turbomeca Arrius 2B2 gas turbine engines are located in separate fireproof
compartments aft of the main transmission and above the rear cabin. The engines are of
the free wheel turbo shaft type, with single-stage centrifugal compressors, reverse-flow
combustors, and single-stage gas producer and power turbines.
3
9
2
10
11
1
15
14
13
Fig. 7-15
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
12
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
11
7 - 17
Fig. 7-16
7 - 18
1
2
3
4
5
EC135_FLH_0061_R
Oil filter
Oil P/T transmitter
Low oil pressure switch
Strainer
Electrical magnetic plug
12
13
14
AIR VENT
BREATHING
6
7
8
9
11
10
15
2
3
10
11
12
13
Pressure pump
Scavenge pumps
Oil cooler
Oil cooler by-pass valve
7.4.2
SCAVENGE
SUPPLY
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.4.3
7.4.3.1 FADEC
The engines are controlled by the FADEC (Full-Authority-Digital-Engine-Control) system.
It provides all functions which are necessary for economical, comfortable and safe
engine operation. These functions are:
Fuel supply, in dependency of the N1 RPM, during starting procedure and ground
idle operation.
Automatic engine control in all speed and power ranges of the engines.
105
104
Rotor rpm(%)
103
102
AEO
OEI
hover flight
AEO
101
100
99
EC135_FLH_0089_R
98
97
96
95
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
20000
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 19
EFFECTIVITY
1
2
3
4
Fig. 7-19
EFFECTIVITY
1
2
3
4
2
3
Fig. 7-20
7 - 20
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
All
Fig. 7-21
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 21
Now the pilot is able to control the engine by twisting the respective grip from the neutral
position N towards MIN or MAX direction as required (see para. 7.3.3.1). As soon as the
twist grip is turned out of the N position the TWIST GRIP caution comes on at the CAD.
To change from manual mode back to normal mode the ENG MODE SEL switch has to
be set from MAN to NORM position. The ENG MANUAL caution disappears. To regain
the default constellation, set twist grip(s) to neutral (N) position. TWIST GRIP caution
disappears.
7.4.3.4 Engine shutdown
CAUTION
7 - 22
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 23
7.5
HIGH NR MODE
This feature is implemented to increase the performance of the H/C for operation with
gross mass above 2835 kg and/or CAT A operation.
When the HIGH NR mode is manually selected, the High NR mode switches
automatically between nominal and high rotorspeed (NRO) according to Fig. 7-17.
The High NR mode is mandatory for:
Flight with gross mass above 2835 kg
Cat A operation
HEC operation
NOTE
The use of the HIGH NR mode is permitted for all other operations.
For noise reduction reasons its use should be limited to a minimum.
The pilot has to select the HIGH NR mode prior to takeoff by pushing the HI NR pb. ON
illuminates on the push button. Additionally the advisory indicator HIGH NR illuminates
(see Fig. 7-22). If the HI NR pb is pushed again the mode is deselected and the HIGH
NR advisory goes off.
When the HIGH NR mode is selected (HI NR pb shows ON), airspeed information
provided by the ADC 2 to the VEMD lane 2 triggers the HIGH NR mode activation as
follows:
1 When the airspeed increases above 55 KIAS, the HIGH NR mode is automatically
deactivated, so that NRO decreases to the nominal NRO. The HIGH NR advisory goes
off.
2 When the airspeed reduces below 50 KIAS, the HIGH NR mode is automatically
reactivated and NRO increases by up to 3 %. The HIGH NR advisory comes on.
NOTE
In case of selected but not activated HIGH NR mode, the system automatically activates
the high NRO, if:
no or invalid data from ADC 2 available
the CAD is switched off or failed
VEMD lower lane is switched off or failed
7 - 24
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
HIGH NR mode
not selected
selected
Push button
location: IPanel
inactive
active
Advisory indication
location: Above MASTER
CAUTION
Fig. 7-22
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 25
7.6
7.6.1
Storage
Fuel is stored in underfloor compartments using two bladder type fuel cells comprising a
main tank and a supply tank. The supply tank comprises two seperate sections, with
different capacities, each supplying one engine. This ensures that the LOW FUEL
cautions do not come on simultaneously. From the supply tank, located directly aft of the
main tank, fuel is transferred to the engines. The main and the supply tank are
interconnected via spill ports and transfer lines. The volume above the spill ports of the
main and supply tank is a part of the main tank capacity.
4
10
EC135_FLH_0083_R
FWD
Fig. 7-23
7 - 26
Fig. 7-24
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
12
11
12
13
14
15
EC135_FLH_0063_R
15
Atmosphere
14
Pressurising valve
Start electro-valve
Main injectors
Preference injector
Start injectors
11
Valve
assembly
7 Constant DP valve
8 Metering unit with manual
fuel control valve
9 Manual purge
10 Shut off valve
Metering unit
10
13
7 - 27
7.6.2
Supply
The engine driven fuel pumps alone provides enough suction capacity to draw fuel from
the supply tank via fuel supply lines and emergency shut off valves. The emergency shut
off valves can be activated by pushing the EMER OFF SW 1 or 2 switches, located on
the instrument panel. They receive power from the No. 1 DC essential bus through the
FUEL-V ENG I or II circuit breakers. Additionally two canister type fuel pumps are
installed to guarantee a continuous fuel transfer from the main tank to the supply tank.
They are activated by the switches XFER-F or -A, and protected via the XFER-F-PUMP
and XFER-A-PUMP circuit breakers.
A fuel prime pump is installed in each chamber of the supply tank which can be
controlled via the PRIME I or II switches (Only necessary when starting the engines). The
fuel pump circuits are protected by the PRIME P ENG I or II circuit breakers.
Fig. 7-25
7.6.3
Annunciators
LOW FUEL 1/2
A warning light is activated by the respective low level sensor that indicates that the
remaining fuel quantity in the respective supply tank cell is below the defined threshold
value. The low level sensors receive their power from the No. 1 DC essential bus through
the FUEL-L SYS I or FUEL-L SYS II circuit breakers, located on the overhead console.
7 - 28
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.7
Temperature sensors located in the cabin ceiling and in the heater supply duct
Distribution box and pipes are used from the standard ventilation system located under
the copilot floor.
The bleed air ejector valve assy utilizes dual metering valves driven by a common motor
via a linear actuator. The bleed air sources are kept separate throughout the valve and
do not mix prior to the venturi. The computer powers the motor to regulate the flow of
bleed air via the interconnected valves. The valve position is constantly adjusted by the
computer as a function of cabin air temp, as sensed by the cabin temp thermistor and
the BLD HTG rheostat setting. The fully open and closed positions are monitored by
micro switches.
In case that an overheat switch will close the heater valves, the caution HTG OVTEMP
on the CAD comes on. The unique feature of the ejector design is that it incorporates
dual bleed air ports in a single valve. Cross bleed is eliminated by not allowing the bleed
air to mix before the pressure in the venturi nozzle is equal to ambient pressure.
EFFECTIVITY
The cabin air temperature is controlled by the BLD HTG rheostat located at the overhead
panel and the PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob located at the aft center console.
When the rheostat is rotated from the OFF position, the heater system is put into
operation. The operation is indicated by an advisory message on the CAD. Further
rotation of the rheostat will increase heater output until the desired temperature is
reached. When the desired setting of the rheostat is reached, the temperature controller
will automatically maintain the corresponding temperature. The heater is shut off by
moving the BLD HTG rheostat to the OFF position.
EFFECTIVITY
The cabin air temperature is controlled by the BLD HTG rheostat and the BLD HTG
switch located at the overhead panel and by the PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob
located at the aft center console. Switching to the NORM position, the heater system is
put into operation. The operation is indicated by an advisory message on the CAD. A
rotation of the rheostat will increase heater output until the desired temperature is
reached. When the desired setting of the rheostat is reached, the temperature controller
will automatically maintain the corresponding temperature. The heater is shut off by
switching the BLD HTG switch to the OFF position.
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 29
In case of OEI conditions (if N1 > N1 OEI MCP), both shut off valves are closed
automatically.
The setting of the heater switch from NORM to EMER will reengage the heating system.
The heater receives power from the No.2 DC essential bus via the HTG CONT circuit
breaker and from the No.1 DC essential bus via the HTG MOTOR circuit breaker, both
located on the overhead panel.
NOTE
7.7.1
Bleed air heating will not work at a cabin temperature of approx. 25C or above or
if PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob in center console is in full down position.
Alternative installation
As an alternative the Disrtribution flap knob and Air circulation knob can be installed
instead of PULL for HEATING/DEFOG knob and PULL for AIR knob.
Additional air outlets pilot/copilot can be installed in the cockpit
EC135_FLH_0343_R
Crew
Defog
CPDS
Fig. 7-26
EC135_FLH_0344_R
Fresh air
Circulating air
Fig. 7-27
7.7.2
7 - 30
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
WINDSHIELD
Fig. 7-28
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
IPANEL
COOLING(OPT)
IPANEL
COOLING(OPT)
COPILOT
PILOT
CDS/CAD
M
I
N
AMBIENT AIR
BLEED AIR
BLD HTG
M
A
X
OPTION EMS
CABIN AIR
ENGINE
2
NOISE
SUPPRESSOR
M M
MIXING VALVE:
1 METERING DEVICE (PRIMARY)
2 SHUTOFF DEVICE (SECONDARY)
ENGINE
FIREWALL
ENGINE
1
DUCT OVERTEMP.
SWITCH (>120C)
MIXING VALVE
LOW N1SIGNAL
DUCT TEMP.SENSOR
CONTROL BOX
DUCT OVERTEMP.
SWITCH (>85C)
FOR RETURN AIR
HTG
CONT
ESS.BUS
SYS.II
OVERHEAD PNL
VENTURI
OPTION EMS
EXHAUST
CL
OP
CL
NORM
VENTURI
EXHAUST
OP
OFF
ESS.BUS
SYS. I
HTG
MOTOR
PULL FOR
FRESH AIR
BELOW FLOOR
VARIABLE
SPEED
BLOWER
PULL FOR
HEATING/DEFOG
CABIN TEMP.
SENSOR
WITH FAN
INSTALLED INSIDE CABIN
BELOW INTERIOR PANELING
HTG OVTEMP
(CAUTION)
BLEED AIR
(ADVISORY)
EMER
EFFECTIVITY
CDS
COOLING
EC135_FLH_0187_R
7 - 31
EFFECTIVITY
IPANEL
COOLING(OPT)
IPANEL
COOLING(OPT)
COPILOT
PILOT
CDS/CAD
(ADVISORY)
HTG
MOTOR
ESS.BUS
SYS. I
BLD HTG
M
A
X
OPTION EMS
N
O
R
M
CABIN AIR
ENGINE
2
NOISE
SUPPRESSOR
M M
MIXING VALVE:
1 METERING DEVICE (PRIMARY)
2 SHUTOFF DEVICE (SECONDARY)
ENGINE
FIREWALL
ENGINE
1
DUCT OVERTEMP.
SWITCH (>120C)
MIXING VALVE
LOW N1SIGNAL
DUCT TEMP.SENSOR
CONTROL BOX
DUCT OVERTEMP.
SWITCH (>85C)
FOR RETURN AIR
HTG
CONT
ESS.BUS
SYS.II
OVERHEAD PNL
VENTURI
OPTION EMS
EXHAUST
CL
OP
CL
EMER
VENTURI
EXHAUST
OP
M
I
N
AMBIENT AIR
BLEED AIR
PULL FOR
FRESH AIR
BELOW FLOOR
VARIABLE
SPEED
BLOWER
PULL FOR
HEATING/DEFOG
CABIN TEMP.
SENSOR
WITH FAN
INSTALLED INSIDE CABIN
BELOW INTERIOR PANELING
HTG OVTEMP
(CAUTION)
BLEED AIR
OFF
EFFECTIVITY
WINDSHIELD
7 - 32
CDS
COOLING
EC135_FLH_0413_R
All
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.8
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
7.8.1
Main Transmission
EC135_WAH_0259_D
FWD
12
EC135_WAH_0256_D
FWD
3
6
13
11
14
10
View A
9
8
7
8
9
10
11
15
15 Oil filter
16 Oil gage glass
FWD
16
Fig. 7-30
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 33
7.8.2
XMSN OIL T
3
7
XMSN OIL P
11
10
supply
scavenge
EC135_FLH_0064_R
XMSN OIL P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7.8.3
7
8
9
10
11
Oil tank
Magnetic chip detector
Oil pumps with by-pass valve
Oil pressure switches
Metering check valves
7 - 34
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.8.4
4
7
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Primary bellows
Compression spring
Secondary bellows
Mass jacket
Glycol solution
Bleed screw
Pendulum with tuning mass
Bearing cage with bearing
Fig. 7-32
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 35
7.9
ROTOR SYSTEMS
The rotor systems consist of a bearing- and hingeless single main rotor and a fan-in-fin
type tail rotor. Both systems are driven by the two engines through the transmission
system.
7.9.1
7.9.2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 7-33
7 - 36
8
6
9
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
1 Pitch horn
2 Blade fitting
3 Flexbeam
2
1
Fig. 7-34
4
3
2
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Swash-plate
Elastomeric lead-lag damper
Blade retention bolts
Rotor hub cap
Rotor blade dynamic tuning cover
Pitch horn
Rotating control rods
Control cuff
Fig. 7-35
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
1
8
7 - 37
7.10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
The hydraulic system consists of two identical but independent pressure supply systems.
The pressure supply system 1 is installed on the left forward part, system 2 on the right
forward part of the main transmission. The pumps of both systems are driven by the main
transmission. They equally supply the actuators of the main rotor control with operating
pressure. System 2 also supplies the actuator of the tail rotor control. If one of the
pressure supply systems fails, the normal system continues to supply the main rotor
actuators and the operating force of the main rotor actuators decrease to half. On system
2 failure the tail rotor control operates without hydraulic boost. In case of low pressure in
one hydraulic system the respective caution HYD PRESS comes on.
1
7
1
2
3
4
Sight glass
Fluid level indicator
Reservoir
Return line
Fig. 7-36
5 Pressure line
6 Hydraulic pump
7 Valve block
The hydraulic system can be tested on ground by means of the test switch located on
the overhead console (Fig. 7-2). (see also hydraulic system check in section 4). Selecting
test switch position SYS 1 disengages the hydraulic supply system 2 and the respective
HYD PRESS system 2 caution comes on. Simultaneously the pedal forces increase.
Selecting position SYS 2 disengages the hydraulic supply system1 and HYD PRESS
system 1 caution comes on.
Fig. 7-37
7 - 38
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
RESERVOIR
PUMP
VALVE
UNIT
VALVE
UNIT
RESERVOIR
FILTER PUMP
FILTER
Test switch
CAD
SYSTEM I
HYD PRESS
Fig. 7-38
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
MISC
SYSTEM II
HYD PRESS
7 - 39
7.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SHEDDING BUS I
SHEDDING BUS II
SHED BUS
E
M
E
R
N
O
R
M
HIGH POWER
CONSUMERS
HIGH POWER
CONSUMERS
PRIMARY BUS I
R
E
S
R
E
S
O
F
F
O
F
F
N
O
R
M
N
O
R
M
BUS TIE I
PRIMARY BUS II
BUS TIE II
EXTERNAL
POWER
RECEPTACLE
ESSENTIAL BUS II
ESSENTIAL BUS I
NORM
ON
O
F
F
RESET
GEN I
NORM
O
F
F
RESET
BAT MSTR
O
F
F
RESET
GEN II
DC POWER CONTROL
EC135_FLH_0065_R
BATTERY BUS
GENERATOR
1
BATTERY
GENERATOR
2
RELAY
Fig. 7-39
7 - 40
7.11.1
1
2
3
4
Mounting bracket
Spotlight focusing ring
Spotlight switch on/off and dim ring
Housing cover
Fig. 7-40
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 41
7.12
Before take off and landing and visual approach the map holder should be
retracted and the light should be switched off.
Two switches are installed on the map holder. One switch with dimming function and one
switch with three positions:
NVG for NVG operation
OFF
WHITE for normal white light operation
7.13
Power can be applied to the USB port on the side of the instrument panel when
Non-essential bus is powered. A switch is located in the overhead console.
Power cable of tablet should be routed through the opening provided in the fabric glare
shield to the connection port in the instrument panel and excess length should be tied up
such not to hamper the pilot.
When stowing the tablet holder (recommended for takeoff and landing) with fabric glare
shields installed, one should, after stowing, pull the elastic band around the holder to
raise the glareshield such way that it is not blocking the field of view through the chin
bubble more than necessary (Fig. 7-41).
Holder can be stowed/un-stowed by pulling the locking pin and tilted when friction is
released by turning the knob on the side of the holder.
The tablet holder is delivered with a screw installed to prevent direct installation of a
tablet. An accompanying placard on the face of the holder states: Usage of portable
electronic device subject to operational authorization. Before inserting the device:
removal of screw necessary. This, as the operator of the aircraft have to gain permission
of local authorities first, before usage of a tablet in flight is allowed.
At night a tablet should only be used when a filter is applied to the screen or brightness
can be reduced to such a level to prevent strong reflections in the primary field of view of
the pilot.
7 - 42
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
4
1
2
3
4
Fig. 7-41
7.13.1
7.14
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 43
7.15
the first limit indication (FLI) including N1 (nN1), TOT and torque values
OAT
48
44
EC135_FLH_0112_R
Fig. 7-42
7 - 44
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
EC135_FLH_0113_R
Systems Description
Fig. 7-43
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 45
7.15.1
General
The VEMD (fig. 7-43) consists of two processing modules (lanes) and two screens
combined in a housing. All input signals are received and processed by the two
processing modules and the results, exchanged through the crosstalk links, are
compared by the two processors. In case of discrepancy a failure message is displayed.
In case of one module failure, all the functions remain available on the other module.
Each processing module receives power from a separate power supply. In case of a
failure of one power supply the remaining power supply can provide power to both
processing modules. The VEMD receives power from the ESS BUS I and ESS BUS II via
the VEMD circuit breakers. Several buttons on the right-hand side of the screens provide
VEMD control as follows:
OFF1 / OFF 2:
BRT+/BRT:
SCROLL:
RESET:
SELECT:
ENTER:
+/:
The CAD (Fig. 7-42) consists of one processing module (lane) and one screen
combined in a housing. The CAD receives power from the ESS BUS I and ESS BUS II
via the CAD circuit breakers. Several buttons on the right-hand side of the screen
provide CAD control as follows:
7 - 46
OFF:
SCROLL:
SELECT:
BRT+/BRT:
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.15.2
EC135_WAH_0560_R
When the MAINT mode is activated, the MAINTENANCE MENU page is automatically
displayed on the VEMD upper screen. The CAD displays the message MAINTENANCE
MODE.
MAINTENANCE MENU
FLIGHT REPORT
FAILURE
HOOK
OVER LIMIT
INFLIGHT EPC RESULT
TRANS. DATA
FUNCT. TIMES
DATALOADING
MODE NOT AVAILABLE
HARMONIZATION IN PROGRESS
Fig. 7-44
FLIGHT REPORT
in FLIGHT mode the FLIGHT REPORT page (see Fig. 7-54) automatically displayed after flight, before CPDS is switched off. In MAINTENANCE mode the page is available even afterwards.
FAILURE
MMOVERLIMIT
INFLIGHT EPC
RESULT
displays the memorized Inflight EPC result page from the selected
flight.
TRANS DATA
FUNC. TIMES
DATA LOADING
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 47
The MAINT MODE mode can only be activated when the engine is detected in the
shut-down state and the VEMD screens must be switched off, the CAD must be
switched on. To access this mode proceed as follows:
Press
OFF1
OFF2
RESET
MAINT MODE
+
SCROLL
Fig. 7-45
7 - 48
press SELECT to change to another field; the first field is preselected by default.
press ENTER to validate a field; once a new field is selected, press ENTER to move
to the associated page or to initiate the associated procedure.
press RESET to return from this page to the MENU page or to the previous page.
press SCROLL to change to another page; if a function includes more than one page
for the same application, press SCROLL to scroll between the pages.
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
EC135_WAH_0560_R
AIRCRAFT CONFIGURATION
AUXILIARY FUEL TANK:
ICING RATE SYSTEM:
SECOND BATTERY:
EXTERNAL LOAD:
HOOK
FUEL FLOW WITH SENSOR:
FUEL UNIT:
UNIT SYSTEM:
ALT. AND SPEED UNIT:
MAST MOMENT:
N/I
N/I
N/I
HOOK
N/I
LITER
SI
METER
N/I
N/I:
N = Not installed
I = Installed
HOOK / CABLE*
* for external hoist
LITER/IMP GAL/
US GAL/KG/LB
SI/IMPERIAL
METER/FEET
VALID / ABORT
NOTE: The A/C CONFIG page shows some optional equipment.
If the Weighing System is not installed the CPDS must not be configured for
HOOK indication
Fig. 7-46
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 49
The CONFIG MODE mode can only be activated when the engine is detected in the
shut-down state and the VEMD screens must be switched off, the CAD must be
switched on. To access this mode proceed as follows:
Press
OFF1
OFF2
SELECT
CONFIG MODE
appears on the CAD
ENTER
Fig. 7-47
7 - 50
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
1. FIELD
MODIFY
SELECT
or
SELECT
2. FIELD
Proceed as above
n. FIELD
SELECT
ENTER
VALID FIELD
Validate para
meters and
store in memory
ABORT FIELD
SELECT
ENTER
Fig. 7-48
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
Display message
NO STORAGE
Return to
FLIGHT mode
by switching
both screens off
and on again
7 - 51
ground phase
start/relight phase
flight phase
shut-down phase
In FLIGHT mode the symbology page combinations mentioned below are accessible to
the crew members, displayed on both VEMD and CAD screens.
First limit page:
NOTE
7 - 52
FLI
The EPC page and the EPC result page can be selected by means of the SCROLL
button
Inflight EPC page:
INFLIGHT EPC
RESULT
ELEC/VEH
CAU/FUEL
CAU/FUEL FAIL
(appears automatically in
case of CAU/FUEL page
failure)
CAU/BACKUP
SYSTEM STATUS
(appears automatically in
case of EPC failure)
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
is displayed on the upper VEMD screen (in case of upper VEMD failure it is
displayed on the lower VEMD screen)
ENG FAIL or
FADEC FAIL or
ENG MANU
IDLE
may appear as
caution on both
sides
EC135_FLH_0108_R
820
95.0
FLI FAIL or
FLI DEGR
may appear as
caution on both
sides
Message zone
FLI page
7 - 53
If one parameter fails, the digital value disappears and the parameter turns into yellow.
FLI DEGR caution appears on the CAD and FLI DEGR appears at the bottom (left or
right) of the FLI page. During start mode, if TOT is invalid, the needle disappears and
starting of engine is impossible.
If the lost parameter was designated as first limit before the failure, the first limit status
will change automatically to the next limiting parameter on the affected system. Thus, a
pointer split may be encountered on the FLI which should not be tried to be matched by
engine trimming.
In case of loss of torque and nN1 signal of the same system, the parameters turn into
yellow and FLI FAIL caution appears on the CAD and at the bottom (left or right) of the
FLI page and the needle disappears..
Due to the fact that normal N1 is displayed as digital value but nN1 is presented by the
pointer if designated as first limit parameter, both parameter, N1 and nN1 are displayed
in yellow in case of N1 signal failure. If only nN1 is invalid, nN1 is displayed in yellow
above the N1 indication.
The message zone indicates messages concerning failures and detected overlimits that
are either not visible in the current display status or require action by the crew e.g. to
switch off a screen.
7 - 54
LANE 1 FAILED
PRESS OFF 1
LANE 2 FAILED
PRESS OFF 2
CAD FAILED
CAUTION DETECTED
CROSSTALK FAILED
PRESS OFF
PRESS OFF 2
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
The LIMIT sign appears in the following cases (for N1(nN1), TOT, Tq and Mast Moment
optional):
LIMIT
88 mn 88 s
Fig. 7-50
LIMIT sign
when operating under AEO TOP ( > 5 min.) condition. (Additionally an audio
signal is generated)
NOTE
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 55
EC135_WAH_0560_R
NOT INSTALLED
SANDFILTER SELECT
BLEED AIR CONSUMERS
SWITCH OFF
STANDARD PRESSURE ALTITUDE
< 10000 ft
GENERATOR LOAD
REDUCE
STEADY LEVEL FLIGHT >65KIAS
PERFORM
ENG TRQ 2x60%
ADJUST
IF COLL STOP REACHED
DISMATCH TRQ
EPC START
PRESS ENTER
Fig. 7-51
7 - 56
ENG 1
MARGIN
ENG 2
XXXX
N1 %
XXXX
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
EC135_WAH_0560_R
ENG 1
ENG 2
XXX.X
XXXX
XXX.X
TRQ %
TOTC
N1 %
XXX.X
XXXX
XXX.X
XXXX
ALT ft
XXXX
XX.X
OAT C
XX.X
ENG 1
MARGIN
ENG 2
XXX.X
N1 %
XXX.X
Fig. 7-52
VEMD display with optional EPC result page (version) typical installation
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 57
EC135_WAH_0560_R
INVALID PARAMETERS:
Fig. 7-53
7 - 58
OAT RANGE
TRQ1
TOT1
N1 1
P0 1
T0 1
TRQ2
TOT2
N1 2
P0 2
T0 2
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
is displayed on the lower VEMD screen or, in case of screen failure, on another valid
screen.
indicates parameters that are only given for information to the pilot. The information
must be validated by the pilot.
FLIGHT REPORT
FLIGHT NUMBER
XXXXX
DURATION XX h XX min
FLIGHT / TOTAL
CYCLE
FIGHT / TOTAL
XX.XX / XXXX.XX
XX.XX / XXXX.XX
N1
N2
XX.XX / XXXX.XX
XX.XX / XXXX.XX
EC135_WAH_0560_R
OVERLIMT
MM > 66%
MM > 78%
TIME
XXmnXX.Xs
XXmnXX.Xs
MAX
XXX.X %
XXX.X %
PRESS RESET
CPDS/FCDS/AFCS failure indication
Indication of Mast Moment (MM) exceeding, accumulated time and max. MM. (The same information is
available on maintenance pages.)
Fig. 7-54
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 59
The units for the various parameters on this page can be changed as described in
7.15.2.2 Configuration mode.
DC [V]
Options:
GEN [AMPS]
HOOK
[kg] or [lb]
CABLE
LWC
Not installed
BAT [AMPS]
kg
EC135_FLH_0119_R
HOOK
If a parameter is invalid, the numerical value disappears and a yellow failure symbology appears
Fig. 7-55
7 - 60
GEN field
SELECT
MODIFY
or
Display a new
state
SELECT
ENTER
SELECT
MODIFY
or
Display previous
state
Box
cleared
xxx field
Fig. 7-56
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
Proceed as above
7 - 61
The aquisition of the fuel parameters is only performed on the CAD; they are no longer
available in case of CAD failure.
The units for the various parameters on this page can be changed as described in
7.15.2.2 Configuration mode.
Caution/Advisory
half page
(see description)
EC135_FLH_0433_R
Values
depending on
the type of fuel
tank
Fig. 7-57
7 - 62
CAU/FUEL page
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
END
FUEL kg
QUANTITY
NOT
AVAILABLE
FF1
Fig. 7-58
AUX
FF2
END
FUEL kg
AUX
FF1
FF2
Fig. 7-59
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 63
displays all amber cautions as well as green advisories. The amber cautions are
associated with amber master.
lists the cautions from the page top to the bottom and the advisories beneath
Start mode
During power up a caution input test checks the presence of the following
cautions:
SYSTEM I
MISC
SYSTEM II
ENG FAIL
ENG FAIL
ENG OIL P
ENG OIL P
FUEL PRESS
FUEL PRESS
HYD PRESS
HYD PRESS
XMSN OIL P
XMSN OIL P
GEN DISCON
GEN DISCON
If the test was not successful INP FAIL appears in conjunction with the failed
caution. After 8 seconds ACK NEEDED appears on VEMD upper lane.
7 - 64
MISC
SYSTEM II
ENG FAIL
F PUMP AFT
ENG FAIL
ENG OIL P
F PUMP FWD
ENG OIL P
FADEC FAIL
EPU DOOR
FADEC FAIL
FUEL PRESS
BAT DISCON
FUEL PRESS
HYD PRESS
EXT POWER
HYD PRESS
XMSN OIL P
XMSN OIL P
GEN DISCON
GEN DISCON
INVERTER
INVERTER
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
a thick yellow line flashes above and underneath the new cautions
they wait for aquisition by the crew members (CDS/AUDIO RES button on
the cyclic stick grip or CAD SELECT key if CAD is available or VEMD
ENTER key if CAD is not available)
Any caution, new or acknowledged, that is no longer evident disappears and after 5
seconds the one underneath moves one line up.
SYSTEM I
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
FLI DEGR
FLI FAIL
ENG FAIL
ENG OIL P
ENG CHIP
FADEC FAIL
FUEL PRESS
FUEL FILT
ENG O FILT
IDLE
TRAINING
TRAIN IDLE
ENG MANUAL
TWIST GRIP
F VALVE
DEGRADE
REDUND
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
MISC
P DAMPER
NMS
XMSN CHIP
TRGB CHIP
XMSN OIL T
ROTOR BRK
AUTOPILOT
DECOUPLE
XMSN OFILT
DOORS
TRIM
F PUMP AFT
F PUMP FWD
T1 MISCMP
P0 MISCMP
F QTY FAIL
F QTY DEGR
HTG OVTEMP
continued on next page
SYSTEM II
FLI DEGR
FLI FAIL
ENG FAIL
ENG OIL P
ENG CHIP
FADEC FAIL
FUEL PRESS
FUEL FILT
ENG O FILT
IDLE
TRAINING
TRAIN IDLE
ENG MANUAL
TWIST GRIP
F VALVE
DEGRADE
REDUND
7 - 65
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
PRIME PUMP
HYD PRESS
XMSN OIL P
OVSP
GEN OVHT
GEN DISCON
INVERTER
FIRE EXT
FIRE E TST
BUSTIE OPN
STARTER
ENG CHP CT
ENG OF CT
F FILT CT
PITOT HTR
FUEL VALVE CL
ENG EXCEED
EPU DOOR
BAT DISCON
EXT POWER
SHED EMER
DG
HOR BAT
CA CUT ARM*
FLOATS ARM*
P/R SAS*
YAW SAS*
XMSN CHP CT
XMSN OF CT
XMSN OT CT
TRGB CHP CT
ACTUATION
GYRO
CAU DEGR
CAD FAN
VEMD FAN
CPDS OVHT
RNAV*
SAND FILT*
MSG*
FUEL
PRIME PUMP
HYD PRESS
XMSN OIL P
OVSP
GEN OVHT
GEN DISCON
INVERTER
FIRE EXT
FIRE E TST
BUSTIE OPN
STARTER
ENG CHP CT
ENG OF CT
F FILT CT
PITOT HTR
FUEL VALVE CL
ENG EXCEED
7 - 66
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
The green coloured advisories indicated beneath the cautions keeps the pilot
informed about operating conditions of additional (optional) equipment which is not
essential for the flight.
Advisories and their explanation:
BLEED AIR
AIR COND
HOOK UNLD
S/L LIGHT
S/L LT EXT
IR ON
SAND FILT
IFCO
PITOT HTR
AUX F XFER
TRAIN ARM
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 67
SCROLL
SCROLL
SCROLL
Page 1 of n
Page 2 of n
Page n of n
Fig. 7-61
7 - 68
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
is displayed on the CAD screen when both VEMD lanes are not available.
Caution half
page
(see previous
description)
EC135_FLH_0434_R
Backup
page
Supply tank
II
Values
depending
on the type
of fuel tank
Main tank
[kg or lb or US gal or imp gal or l]
Fig. 7-62
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
CAU/BACKUP page
7 - 69
is displayed on the VEMD lower screen, except flight mode is detected and one lane
has failed.
System failure function displays messages (MSG) and/or failures (FAIL) concerning both FADEC boxes. Access is provided as follows:
SCROLL
SCROLL
Return to previous
page
SELECT
+ or
+ or
EGT
TRQtrim
FCDS/AFCS status
FCDS1/AFCS
FCDS1/AFCS
FCDS2
FCDS2
Fig. 7-63
7 - 70
EC135_FLH_0110_R
7.15.3
CAU
FUEL
CAU
FLI
FUEL
ELEC
FLI
SYSTEM
STATUS
VEH
EPC
The engine power check (EPC) pages, as described in para
7.15.2.3, can be selected by using the SCROLL button.
CAU
FUEL
FLI
ELEC
VEH
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
AUTOMATICALLY
CAU
FUEL
FLI
FLIGHT
REPORT
7 - 71
flight phase
SCROLL
CAU
ELEC
FLI
FUEL
VEH
FLI
ELEC
shutdown phase
FLIGHT
REPORT
VEH
RESET
ground phase
CAU
FLI
FUEL
ELEC
SCROLL
VEH
SCROLL
SCROLL
ELEC
VEH
7 - 72
FLI
SYSTEM
STATUS
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FLI
SCROLL
FLI
CAU
ELEC
XXX
VEH
- degraded caution indication (see para 3.3.3)
- no fuel indication
SCROLL
SCROLL
FLI
SYSTEM
STATUS
AUTOMATICALLY
FLI
shutdown phase
FLIGHT
REPORT
RESET
BASIC PAGE
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 73
CAU
BACKUP
7 - 74
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7.15.3.5 Derivative mode with CAD and one VEMD lane off
FLI
SCROLL
CAU
XXX
SCROLL
ELEC
VEH
AUTOMATICALLY
shutdown phase
FLIGHT
REPORT
RESET
BASIC PAGE
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
7 - 75
The caution indication in case of CAD and one VEMD lane off is as follows:
No.
1.
FAILED VEMD
LANE
ENG CHIP
2.
REMAINING LANE
XMSN CHIP
ENG CHIP
ROTOR BRK
FADEC FAIL
3.
FLI FAIL
P0 MISCMP
FLI FAIL
4.
FLI DEGR
T0 MISCMP
FLI DEGR
5.
ENG IDLE
6.
HYD PRESS
HYD PRESS
7.
ENG FAIL
ENG FAIL
8.
ENG MANUAL
9.
TWIST GRIP
10.
DEGRADE
11.
REDUND
Fig. 7-64
7 - 76
MISC
Degraded caution indication in case of CAD and one VEMD lane off
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
SUBSECTION 9.0
EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND ADDITIONAL PERFORMANCE DATA
EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY
FMS
9.11
Category A operations
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.239
9.18
9.21
Not applicable
9.22
Dual Controls
9.23
9.24
AC power system
9.25
9.26
9.27
Fuzz burner
9.28
9.29
9.210
9.211
9.212
Not applicable
9.213
9.241, 9.2103
Continued
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - i
FMS
9.214
Not applicable
9.215
Not applicable
9.216
Strobe lights
9.217
9.218
External loudspeakers
9.219
9.220
9.221
Not applicable
9.222
9.223
Not applicable
9.224
9.267
9.225
9.222, 9.294
9.226
9.227
9.228
Not applicable
9.229
9.230
Not applicable
9.231
9.232
9.232
9.231
9.233
9.234
9.235
9.236
Not applicable
9.237
9.238
Continued
9.0 - ii
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
9.239
9.240
9.241
9.242
Not applicable
9.243
Not applicable
9.244
9.245
9.246
9.247
9.248
9.249
9.250
9.251
9.252
9.217
9.26, 9.220, 9.222, 9.267,
9.2103, 9.2113, 9.2117
9.253
9.254
9.255
9.256
9.257
Not applicable
9.258
9.261
9.262
Not applicable
9.259
9.260
9.267
Continued
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - iii
FMS
9.263
9.264
Not applicable
9.265
Not applicable
9.266
9.267
9.268
9.269
9.270
9.271
Not applicable
9.272
9.273
9.274
9.275
9.276
9.277
9.278
9.279
9.280
9.281
9.282
9.267
9.217
Continued
9.0 - iv
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
9.283
9.284
9.285
9.286
9.287
9.288
9.289
9.290
9.291
9.292
9.293
9.294
9.225
9.295
TACAN system
9.296
9.297
9.298
FLOICE 105
9.299
9.218
Continued
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - v
FMS
9.0 - vi
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
FLM
+4%
9.238
9.299
Sandfilter System
Emergency floatation
system
Range
Fuel cons.
4.0%
+4.0%
+1%
1.0%
+1%
1.0%
9.239
Diag.
+2%
9.267
3.0
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
4.0%
+4.0%
4.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
2.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
4.0
3.0%
3.0
3.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
Emergency floatation
system on Intermediate LG
9.267
9.267
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
6.0
4.5%
5,0
4.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
6.0
4.5%
5.0
4.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
9.0
6.5%
7.0
6.5%
+1.5%
1.5%
9.220
9.2117
4.0
2.5%
3.0
2.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
External loudspeaker
9.218
6.0
4.5%
5.0
4.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
EVS1500
9.296
1.5
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
9.297
3.5
2.5%
3.0
2.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
EVS1500 and
4 Additional LED Landing
Lights
9.296
9.297
4.5
3.5%
4.0
3.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.211
1.0
0.5%
1.0
0.5%
1) without cargo hook and mirror(s) assy, the effect of this equipment can be neglected when installed
together with the external loudspeaker
2) with original or with modified access panel installed
3) the effect of this equipment can be neglected when installed close to the external loudspeaker
Continued
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - vii
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
FLIR (Wescam)
9.210
3.0
9.210
3.0
9.245
9.272
FLIR (MX-15i)
Range
Fuel cons.
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
2.5
3.0
2.0%
3.0
9.289
3.5
9.292
FLIR (LEOIIIHD)
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
2.5%
3.0
2.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.2101
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.2106
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
HF 9000
9.290
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.222
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
9.2104
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
FMA
1123
1.0
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
9.293
Diag.
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.294
1.0
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
Laser obstacle
warning system (HELLAS)
9.268
4.0
2.5%
3.0
2.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
Retractable downlink
antenna
9.2113
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
Searchlight SX16(IR)
nose mounted
9.213
4.0
2.5%
3.0
2.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
Searchlight SX16(IR) LH
mounted
9.252
5.5
4.0%
4.5
4.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
Searchlight SX16(IR) on
High LG
9.252
5.5
4.0%
4.5
4.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.2103
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
Snow skids
9.241
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
9.241
3.0
2.0%
2.5
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.241
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.282
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
9.266
1.0%*
1.0%*
1.0%*
Continued
9.0 - viii
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
9.266
Range
4.0%*
Fuel cons.
Range
4.0%*
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
4.0%*
NOTE:
All other optional equipment, presented in chapter 9.2, but not included in this list, has no or
negligible influence on the level flight performance.
Effect of opened / removed doors on the level flight performance (AEO) FMS 9.1-2
Max. horizontal speed**
Equipment installed
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
9.12
5.5
9.12
7.5
10.0
9.12
Range
Fuel cons.
4.0%
4.5
5.5%
6.0
8.0%
8.5
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
4.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
5.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
8.0%
+2.0%
2.0%
not taking into account the VNE limit for open doors= 110 KIAS (power required lower than AEO MCP)
NOTE:
All other combinations, not included in this list have no or negligible influence on the level flight
performance.
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - ix
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
FLM
+5.5%
9.239
Diag.
Emergency floatation
system
9.267
Range
Fuel cons.
5.5%
+5.5%
+2.0%
2.0%
3.0
3.0%
4.0
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
5.5%
+5.5%
5.5%
+2.0%
2.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
4.0%
3.0
3.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
Emergency floatation
system on Intermediate LG
9.267
9.267
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
5.5
5.5%
4.5
5.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
5.5
5.5%
4.5
5.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
9.219
9.247
9.2118
8.0
7.5%
6.5
7.0%
+2.0%
2.0%
9.220
9.2117
3.5
3.5%
2.5
3.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
External loudspeaker
9.218
5.5
5.5%
4.5
5.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
EVS1500
9.296
1.5
1.5%
1.0
1.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.297
3.5
3.5%
2.5
3.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
EVS1500 and
4 Additional LED Landing
Lights
9.296
9.297
4.5
4.5%
3.5
4.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.211
1.0
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
1) without cargo hook and mirror(s) assy, the effect of this equipment can be neglected when installed
together with the external loudspeaker
2) with original or with modified access panel installed
3) the effect of this equipment can be neglected when installed close to the external loudspeaker
Continued
9.0 - x
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
FLIR (Wescam)
9.210
3.0
9.210
3.0
9.245
9.272
FLIR (MX-15i)
Range
Fuel cons.
3.0%
2.5
3.0%
2.5
3.0
3.0%
3.0
9.289
3.5
9.292
FLIR (LEOIIIHD)
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
3.5%
2.5
3.0%
+1.0 %
1.0 %
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.2101
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5 %
0.5 %
9.2106
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
HF 9000
9.290
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0 %
1.0 %
9.222
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.2104
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
FMA
1123
1.0
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
9.293
Diag.
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.294
1.0
1.0%
1.0
1.0%
Laser obstacle
warning system (HELLAS)
9.268
3.5
3.5%
2.5
3.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
Retractable downlink
antenna
9.2113
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
Searchlight SX16(IR)
nose mounted
9.213
3.5
3.5%
2.5
3.0%
+1.0%
1.0%
Searchlight SX16(IR) LH
mounted
9.252
5.0
5.0%
4.0
4.5%
+1.5%
1.5%
Searchlight SX16(IR) on
High LG
9.252
5.0
5.0%
4.0
4.5%
+1.5%
1.5%
9.2103
2.0
1.5%
1.5
1.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
Snow skids
9.241
2.0
2.0%
1.5
1.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.241
3.0
3.0%
2.5
2.5%
+1.0%
1.0%
9.241
2.5
2.0%
2.0
2.0%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.282
2.0
2.0%
1.5
1.5%
+0.5%
0.5%
9.266
1.0%*
1.0%*
1.0%*
Continued
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
9.0 - xi
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
9.266
Range
4.0%*
Fuel cons.
Range
4.0%*
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
4.0%*
NOTE:
All other optional equipment, presented in chapter 9.2, but not included in this list, has no or
negligible influence on the level flight performance.
Effect of opened / removed doors on the level flight performance (OEI condition)
FMS 9.1-2
Max. horizontal speed**
Equipment installed
FMS
Speed
KTAS
Fuel cons.
9.12
5.0
9.12
6.5
9.0
9.12
Range
Fuel cons.
5.0%
4.0
6.5%
5.0
8.5%
7.0
Range
Max. endurance
Fuel cons.
Endurance
4.5%
+1.5%
1.5%
6.0%
+1.5%
1.5%
8.0%
+2.5%
2.5%
not taking into account the VNE limit for open doors= 110 KIAS (power required lower than OEI MCP)
NOTE:
9.0 - xii
All other combinations, not included in this list have no or negligible influence on the level flight
performance.
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
S E C T I O N 9.1
SPECIAL OPERATIONS
LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS
EFFECTIVITY
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
Category A Operations
9.1-1
Rev. 11
OEI Training
9.1-4
Rev. 5
EFFECTIVITY
All
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
9.1-2
EFFECTIVITY
FIRST APPROVAL
EASA; SEP 12, 2006
FAA; OCT 19, 2006
Valid Revision
Third issue
Rev. 2
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
9.1-5
Rev. 4
9.1-6
Rev. 3
9.1-7
Rev. 1
9.1-8
Rev. 2
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
LOG
OF SUPPLEMENTS
Rev. 12.1
FMS
9.14
SUPPLEMENT FOR
OEI TRAINING
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.1) when OEI
Training is intended.
NOTE
Due to the nature of its content, this supplement is divided into four separate,
related subsections that first present General Data applicable to all training
flights and then specific data applicable to takeoff and landing operations (normal and Category A)
Date: 16.10.2006
Approved by EASA
9.1-4 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.1-4 -1
9.1-4 -4
9.1-4 -7
9.1-4 -2
9.1-4 -5
9.1-4 -8
9.1-4 -3
9.1-4 -6
Rem
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.1-4 -9
9.1-4 -16
9.1-4 -23
9.1-4 -10
9.1-4 -17
9.1-4 -24
9.1-4 -11
9.1-4 -18
9.1-4 -12
9.1-4 -19
9.1-4 -25 /
((-26
26 blank)
9.1-4 -13
9.1-4 -20
9.1-4 -14
9.1-4 -21
9.1-4 -15
9.1-4 -22
Rem
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE
ORIGINAL
OCT 16, 2006
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01972)
REVISION
1
FEB 18, 2008
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01430)
REVISION
2
DEZ 05, 2008
(EASA Approval No. R.A.01565)
REVISION
3
MAY 26, 2011
(EASA Approval No. 10035112)
REVISION
3.1
REVISION
4
MAY 06, 2015
(EASA Approval No. 10053212)
REVISION
REVISION 5
Date: JAN 25, 2016
Approved by EASA
9.1-4 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
A. GENERAL DATA
A.1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
The training and demonstration of OEI emergency situations are simulated with the real
OEI limitations, the power being shared equally between the two engines (twin engine
training).
If the condition for training mode operation are not or not longer fulfilled, the OEI training
mode will be either not activated or automatically deactivated.
NOTE
A.2.
For OEI simulation a minimum flight crew of one pilot and one copilot is recommended.
LIMITATIONS
D During OEI Training, Air Condition and Bleed Air Heating must be switched off.
D Use of OEI training mode is only allowed when no cautions are displayed.
D Use of OEI training mode is only allowed with CPDS fully operational and
switched on.
NOTE
A failure of an SMD of the CPDS can lead to erratic indications of the FLI and
digital torque during training mode operation. The training mode operation must
be switched off when a CPDS malfunction is detected.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
9.1-4 3
A.3.
A.3.1.
If a significant RPM decrease (below 92% NR) occurs during training, the OEItraining mode is automatically deactivated and RPM accelerates back to nominal value.
EFFECTIVITY
Procedure
1. ENG MAIN selector sw
(for the engine in TRAIN IDLE)
FLIGHT
2. TRAINING selector sw
OFF
EFFECTIVITY
1. TRAIN sw
EFFECTIVITY
A.3.2.
OFF
All
9.1-4 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
A.4.
EFFECTIVITY
A.4.1.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
IDLE
CAD
FLI
by
A.4.2.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
IDLE
CAD
FLI
NOTE
If TRAINING selector sw is in ARM position do not set both ENG MAIN sws into
IDLE position simultaneously.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
9.1-4 5
A.4.3.
FLI
TRAINING selector sw
CAD
9.1-4 6
FLIGHT
and
TRAINING
T
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
OFF
TRAIN ARM advisory goes off
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
EFFECTIVITY
A.4.4.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
SEL (spring loaded)
CAD
FLI
comes on in conT
junction with TRAINING (ENG 1)
and TRAIN IDLE (ENG 2)
caution indication
OFF
TRAINING and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
TRAIN ARM advisory goes off
FLI
and
TRAINING
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
T
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
SEL (spring loaded)
CAD
FLI
NOTE
If TRAIN sw is in ARM position do not set any ENG MAIN sws into IDLE
position.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
9.1-4 7
A.4.6.
OFF
Both engines in Flight
CAD
FLI
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE
A.4.7.
and
TRAINING
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
T
ALL
After reset, the NRO remains at / returns to nominal value
OEI training with Inlet Barrier Filter System (IBF System) installed, FMS 9.293
OEI training is generally to be performed with both BYPASS sws NORM.
OEI training is possible as long as no amber bargraphs lit on the remote panel.
CAT A training is allowed only with 3 or less green bargraphs illuminated on the remote
panel.
NOTE
A.5.
In case of using the training mode simulating one engine failure the BYPASS
door(s) will not be set to OPEN.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Refer to section B, C and D of this supplement.
9.1-4 8
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
A.6.
A.7.
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
The OEI training mode is implemented to perform a realistic OEI training. This training
mode is based on a twin engine training concept featuring a so called TRAINING and a
TRAINING IDLE engine.
The training mode is designed in a way that engine acceleration/deceleration and NRO
governing reflects a real OEI situation. Control mode of both engines in training is
integral.
The combined power of both engines in training mode will simulate the maximum power
of the 30 sec/ 2 min rating as long as the pilot operates within normal limitations. Topping
functions automatically limit the 30 sec. and 2 min. power. The load will be equally
distributed between both engines.
If the engine is operated within the normal NRO range necessary for training, the torque
topping is set at a constant value of approx. 2 x 64% (30 sec.), respectively 2 x 62.5% (2
min.).
If during OEI training mode operation the RPM decreases down to 92% NRO, the training
mode is automatically deactivated.
EFFECTIVITY
The rotorspeed is increased to its nominal (reference) value in a controlled manner while
the torque of the engines is limited to an acceptable level (approximately 2 x 75%, for not
more than 10 seconds), in order to avoid excessive torque and rotorspeed overshoots.
EFFECTIVITY
The rotorspeed is increased to its nominal (reference) value in a controlled manner while
the torque of the engines is limited to an acceptable level (approximately 2 x 82%, for not
more than 5 seconds), in order to avoid excessive torque and rotorspeed overshoots.
EFFECTIVITY
All
While the FLI pointer simulates OEI the real engine parameters are available as digital
values on both sides of the FLI gauge (see Fig. A1).
EFFECTIVITY
Before FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters up
to S/N 1224 and before SB EC135-31-081
If during OEI training mode operation the ENG MAIN selector switch (of the engine in
TRAIN IDLE) is set back to FLIGHT, an AEO torque topping at a constant value of 2 x
75% is activated for a duration of not more than 10 seconds (with TRAINING selector
switch ON), in order to avoid excessive torque overshoot when training has to be aborted
at low RPM.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 9
EFFECTIVITY
After FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters up to
S/N 1224 and before SB EC135-31-081
If during OEI training mode operation the ENG MAIN selector switch (of the engine in
TRAIN IDLE) is set back to FLIGHT, an AEO torque topping at a constant value of 2 x
82% is activated for a duration of not more than 5 seconds (with TRAINING selector
switch ON), in order to avoid excessive torque overshoot when training has to be aborted
at low RPM.
EFFECTIVITY
After FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters with
S/N 1225 and subsequent or after SB EC13531081
If during OEI training mode operation the TRAIN sw toggling to SEL or switching TRAIN
to OFF and RPM falls below 92% the FADEC aborts the training mode. Both engines will
return to FLIGHT.
EFFECTIVITY
If the training selector switch is set back to OFF position before the engine main selector has been switched back in the FLIGHT position, the OEI training mode is latched by
a relay, in order to avoid an unintended change of the TRAINING IDLE engine into real
idle condition. If the OEI training mode operation is ended in a wrong switching sequence
the relay will hold the training status and both engines will remain in training mode. In this
case, place the respective ENG MAIN switch from IDLE to FLIGHT position to end
training mode.
EFFECTIVITY
The training mode is controlled via a three position TRAIN switch (OFF ARM SEL).
OFF and ARM are fix positions, SEL is a spring loaded toggle position which means that
after each toggle from ARM to SEL, the switch returns to ARM position. Setting the
TRAIN switch to ARM preselects and arms the training mode. The actual training is
activated via the following toggle sequences:
Toggling from ARM to SEL triggers a FADEC driven simulated OEI of engine number
2.
Toggling again from ARM to SEL sets the engine number 2 back to FLIGHT. This
means training mode is off but still armed.
Toggling again from ARM to SEL triggers the simulated OEI of engine 1.
and so on.
Putting the TRAIN swich back to OFF terminates the training procedure.
EFFECTIVITY
All
In case of real engine failure during OEI training mode operation, the remaining engine
automatically turns to a power setting as required.
9.1-4 10
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
TRAIN
TRAINING
IDLE
EC135_FLH_0320_R
OEI LO
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 11
9.1-4 12
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
B.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for engine failure simulation during takeoff and landing.
B.2.
LIMITATIONS
B.2.1.
MASS LIMITATION
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions, refer to the diagram of subsection C (Fig. C1).
NOTE
When sandfilter installed refer to Fig. C 2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. C 3.
B.3.
B.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement. Takeoff and landing training procedures must be
performed according to the basic Flight Manual, para 4.7 and 4.9.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 13
C.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for Category A training operations at
CLEAR HELIPORTS.
When simulating OEI operation, follow the emergency procedures of Category A operations (supplement 9.11, subsection B) and use the GENERAL CAT A Limitations (supplement 9.11, subsection A) and the gross mass value from the TRAINING WAT curve
of this subsection (Fig. C1 or, if sandfilter is installed, Fig. C2 or, if IBF System is
installed, Fig. C3).
C.2.
LIMITATIONS
C.2.1.
MASS LIMITATIONS
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions during Category A (clear heliport), refer to the diagram of this subsection
(Fig.C1).
NOTE
When sandfilter installed refer to Fig. C 2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. C 3.
9.1-4 14
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
EXAMPLE:
Determine:
Known:
OAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 _C
Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5000 ft
External Optional Equipment . . . . . . External Loudspeaker ( 50 kg)
Solution:
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 15
Fig. C1 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport)
9.1-4 16
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
Fig. C2 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport) - Sandfilter
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 17
Fig. C3 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport) - IBF System
9.1-4 18
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
C.3.
C.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement.
C.5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
In supplement 9.11, subsection B, the figures B10 (Rejected Takeoff Distance Required), B11 (continued takeoff distance required) and B14 (landing distance from 50 ft
height to a complete stop on the ground) are not valid for CAT A Clear Heliport Training.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 19
9.1-4 20
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
D.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for Category A training operations at
SURFACE LEVEL OR ELEVATED HELIPORTS OR SHORT FIELD OR CONFINED HELIPORT.
When simulating OEI operation, follow the emergency procedures of Category A operations (supplement 9.11 subsection C E), and use the GENERAL CAT A Limitations
(supplement 9.11, subsection A) and the gross mass value from the TRAINING WAT
curve of this subsection (Fig. D1 or, if sandfilter is installed, Fig. D2)
D.2.
LIMITATIONS
D.2.1.
MASS LIMITATIONS
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions during Category A (VTOL), refer to the diagram (Fig. D1) of this subsection.
NOTE
When sandfilter is installed refer to Fig. D2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. D1.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
9.1-4 21
EXAMPLE:
For helicopter with external optional equipment installed (Fig. C1; D1)
Determine:
Known:
OAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 _C
Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 ft
External Optional Equipment . . . . . . External Loudspeaker ( 50 kg)
Solution:
9.1-4 22
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
NOTE
9.1-4 23
Fig. D2 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (VTOL) - Sandfilter
9.1-4 24
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
D.3.
D.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement.
D.5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change to Flight Manual Supplement 9.11 subsections C, D, E.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 5
EFFECTIVITY
FMS
9.16
NOTE
When operating with takeoff gross mass up to 2950 kg this supplement shall be attached to
the EC 135 Flight Manual.
Approved by EASA
9.1-6 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are new, revised or deleted respectively. Remove and dispose
of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the record of
supplement-revisions as necessary.
Rev.No Rem
9.1-6-1
9.1-6-2
9.1-6-3
9.1-6-4
9.1-6-5
9.1-6-6
9.1-6-7
9.1-6-8
9.1-6-9
Page
Rev.No Rem
Page
Rev.No Rem
9.1-6-16
9.1-6-31
9.1-6-17
9.1-6-32
9.1-6-18
9.1-6-33
9.1-6-19
9.1-6-34
9.1-6-20
9.1-6-35
9.1-6-21
9.1-6-36
9.1-6-22
9.1-6-37
9.1-6-23
9.1-6-38
9.1-6-24
9.1-6-39
9.1-6-10
9.1-6-25
9.1-6-40
9.1-6-11
9.1-6-26
9.1-6-12
9.1-6-27
9.1-6-41 /
((-42
42 blank)
9.1-6-13
9.1-6-28
9.1-6-14
9.1-6-29
9.1-6-15
9.1-6-30
9.1-6 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
LOG OF REVISIONS
FIRST ISSUE
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
MAR 23, 2012
(EASA Approval No. 10038927)
REVISION
2
JUL 17, 2012
(EASA Approval No. 10040621)
REVISION
3
MAY 12, 2014
(EASA Approval No. 10048914, REV. 1)
REVISION
REVISION 4
Date: DEC 18, 2015
Approved by EASA
9.1-6 3
SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
2.1
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1-6 7
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.8.1
2.9
2.10
2.10.1
2.10.2
2.10.3
2.10.4
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
9.1-6 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
Page
2.14
2.14.1
2.14.2
2.14.3
2.14.5
2.14.6
2.15
2.15.1
2.15.2
2.15.3
2.15.4
2.15.5
2.15.6
2.16
2.16.1
2.16.2
2.17
2.17.1
2.17.2
2.17.3
2.17.4
2.17.5
2.17.6
2.17.7
2.18
2.18.1
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
9.1-6 5
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
Fig. 2-1
Fig. 2-2
Fig. 2-3
Fig. 2-4
Fig. 2-5
Fig. 2-6
Fig. 2-7
Fig. 2-8
Fig. 2-9
Fig. 2-10
Fig. 2-11
9.1-6 6
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
2.14
FUEL LIMITATIONS
2.14.1
Fuel viscosity
Maximum fuel viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 cSt
2.14.2
Fuel temperature
Minimum fuel temperature for engine starting (primary fuels, TS1, T1, T2) . . . . . . 19_C
Minimum fuel temperature for engine starting
(secondary fuels except TS1, T1, T2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35_C
2.14.3
Fuel specifications
NOTE
TYPE OF
FUEL
SPECIFICATION
Primary Fuels
NATO
symbol
USA
UK
CIS
Kerosene-50
(AVTURFSII)
JP-8
F 34
MILDTL-83133
DEFSTAN
91-87
DCSEA134
Kerosene-50
(AVTUR)
JET A-1
F 35
ASTM D1655
JET A-1
DEFSTAN
91-91
DCSEA134
Kerosene
ASTM D1655
JET A
F 44
MIL-DTL-5624
JP-5
DEFSTAN
91-86
DCSEA144
Fig. 2-4
Primary Fuels
NOTE D It is the operators responsibility to make certain that the fuel used contains an
anti-icing additive when necessary (see Para. 2.14.5). Additional antiicing
additives shall not be added to pre-blended fuels.
D Normally JP5/JP8 fuels are preblended with anti-icing additives.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
9.1-6 17
9.1-6 18
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
9.1-6 19
2.14.4
20000
17500
15000
TU75 installed
0
2500
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
EC135_FLH_0483_R
Fig. 2-5
NOTE
9.1-6 20
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
2.14.5
Fuel additives
Anti-icing fuel additives:
Before SB EC13511010 or SB EC13571027
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE
C)
10
12
15
15
19
20
30
5
Fig. 2-6
10
20
30
40
50
60
Minimum oil temperture ( C)
70
80
85
Minimum engine oil temperature (versus fuel temperature) required for power application
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
9.1-6 21
EFFECTIVITY
After SB EC13511010
EFFECTIVITY
When using fuel without anti-icing additive for fuel temperaturesv13_C, a minimum engine oil temperature of + 50_C for continuous operation must be
reached.
After SB EC13571027
EFFECTIVITY
When using fuel without anti-icing additive for fuel temperaturesv15_C, a minimum engine oil temperature of + 50_C for continuous operation must be
reached. It is permissible to apply low power when the engine oil temperature
reaches 10_C (0_C for 3cSt oil) to reduce the ground run time.
All
Type
NATO
symbol
Joint
Service
Designat
EGME
S748
DiEGME
S1745
USA
UK
FRANCE
CIS
AL31
MIL-I27686 or
MIL-DTL27686
DERD
2451
AIR
3652
AL41
MIL-I85470 or
MIL-DTL85470
DEF STAN
68-252
AIR
3652
Fig. 2-7
9.1-6 22
Specifications
Anti-icing additives
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
2.14.6
Fuel quantities
Fuel mass values are based on a fuel density of 0.8 kg/liter (8.018 lb/gal (imp.);
6.676 lb/gal (U.S.)).
EFFECTIVITY
TANK
TOTAL FUEL
USABLE FUEL
liters
kilograms
liters
kilograms
Main
565.0
452.0
560.75
448.60
Supply
115.0
92.0
109.80
87.80
Totals
680.0
544.0
670.55
536.40
EFFECTIVITY
liters
4.25
2 x 2.6
9.45
kilograms
3.4
2 x 2.1
7.6
TANK
TOTAL FUEL
USABLE FUEL
liters
kilograms
liters
kilograms
Main
593.1
474.50
588.85
471.10
Supply
116.9
93.50
111.70
89.30
Totals
710.0
568.00
700.55
560.40
EFFECTIVITY
UNUSABLE FUEL
UNUSABLE FUEL
liters
4.25
2 x 2.6
9.45
kilograms
3.4
2 x 2.1
7.6
All
CAUTION PRIMARY SOURCE FOR FUEL QUANTITY INFORMATION IS THE DISPLAYED DIGITAL VALUE. THE PICTORIAL INDICATION HAS TO BE
CONFIRMED BY THE DIGITAL VALUE.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
9.1-6 23
2.15
OIL LIMITATIONS
2.15.1
Oil specifications
Oil Type / Specifications
Engine
Main Transmission
Fenestron
Gearbox
for: 35_CvOATv50_C
for: 30_CvOATv50_C
NOTE
2.15.2
Oil quantities
Liters*
Engines (each tank)
Main Transmission
Fenestron Gearbox
*Oil mass values are assumed as 1.0 kg/ltr.
2.15.3
4.85
10.0 12.0
0.5
2.15.4
9.1-6 24
For oil warm up, the engines have to run in FLIGHT mode at low pitch, and the
gas generator speed (N1) must remain below 90%.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
Placard:
BEI GESCHLOSSENER TR
MUSS DER GRIFF VOLLSTNDIG
VERRIEGELT SEIN
(PARALLEL ZUM FENSTERRAHMEN)
WHEN THE DOOR IS CLOSED,
THE HANDLE MUST BE IN
FULLY CLOSED POSITION
(PARALLEL TO WINDOW FRAME)
Location: Sliding doors, inside, and cockpit door copilot, inside
Placard:
MAX 3 Kg
Location: Beside luggage net on LH and /or RH clamshell door
EFFECTIVITY
After SB EC13525018
Placard:
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 4
EFFECTIVITY
FMS
9.18
SUPPLEMENT FOR
OEI TRAINING FOR FLIGHTS WITH T/O GROSS MASS UP TO 2950 KG
NOTE
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.1) when OEI
Training for flights with takeoff gross mass up to 2950 kg is intended.
NOTE
Due to the nature of its content, this supplement is divided into four separate,
related subsections that first present General Data applicable to all training
flights and then specific data applicable to takeoff and landing operations (normal and Category A)
Approved by EASA
9.1-8 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.1-8 -1
9.1-8 -4
9.1-8 -7
9.1-8 -2
9.1-8 -5
9.1-8 -8
9.1-8 -3
9.1-8 -6
Rem
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.1-8 -9
9.1-8 -17
9.1-8 -25
9.1-8 -10
9.1-8 -18
9.1-8 -26
9.1-8 -11
9.1-8 -19
9.1-8 -27
9.1-8 -12
9.1-8 -20
9.1-8 -28
9.1-8 -13
9.1-8 -21
9.1-8 -29
9.1-8 -14
9.1-8 -22
9.1-8 -30
9.1-8 -15
9.1-8 -23
9.1-8 -16
9.1-8 -24
Rem
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
MAY 06, 2015
(EASA Approval No. 10053212)
REVISION
REVISION 2
Date: JAN 25, 2016
Approved by EASA
9.1-8 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
A. GENERAL DATA
A.1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
The training and demonstration of OEI emergency situations are simulated with the real
OEI limitations, the power being shared equally between the two engines (twin engine
training).
If the condition for training mode operation are not or not longer fulfilled, the OEI training
mode will be either not activated or automatically deactivated.
NOTE
A.2.
For OEI simulation a minimum flight crew of one pilot and one copilot is recommended.
LIMITATIONS
D For gross mass above 2910 kg and up to 2950 kg, the maximum takeoff and
landing altitude for training is 6000 ft DA / 5000 ft PA, whichever is less.
D During OEI Training, Air Condition and Bleed Air Heating must be switched off.
D Use of OEI training mode is only allowed when no cautions are displayed.
D Use of OEI training mode is only allowed with CPDS fully operational and
switched on.
NOTE
A failure of an SMD of the CPDS can lead to erratic indications of the FLI and
digital torque during training mode operation. The training mode operation must
be switched off when a CPDS malfunction is detected.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
9.1-8 3
A.3.
A.3.1.
If a significant RPM decrease (below 92% NR) occurs during training, the OEItraining mode is automatically deactivated and RPM accelerates back to nominal value.
EFFECTIVITY
Procedure
1. ENG MAIN selector sw
(for the engine in TRAIN IDLE)
FLIGHT
2. TRAINING selector sw
OFF
EFFECTIVITY
1. TRAIN sw
EFFECTIVITY
A.3.2.
OFF
All
9.1-8 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
A.4.
EFFECTIVITY
A.4.1.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
IDLE
CAD
FLI
by
A.4.2.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
IDLE
CAD
FLI
NOTE
If TRAINING selector sw is in ARM position do not set both ENG MAIN sws into
IDLE position simultaneously.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
9.1-8 5
A.4.3.
FLI
TRAINING selector sw
CAD
9.1-8 6
FLIGHT
and
TRAINING
T
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
OFF
TRAIN ARM advisory goes off
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
EFFECTIVITY
A.4.4.
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
SEL (spring loaded)
CAD
FLI
comes on in conT
junction with TRAINING (ENG 1)
and TRAIN IDLE (ENG 2)
caution indication
OFF
TRAINING and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
TRAIN ARM advisory goes off
FLI
and
TRAINING
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
T
ARM
TRAIN ARM advisory comes on
SEL (spring loaded)
CAD
FLI
NOTE
If TRAIN sw is in ARM position do not set any ENG MAIN sws into IDLE
position.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
9.1-8 7
A.4.6.
OFF
Both engines in Flight
CAD
FLI
EFFECTIVITY
NOTE
A.4.7.
and
TRAINING
and TRAIN IDLE
caution indication goes off
T
ALL
After reset, the NRO remains at / returns to nominal value
OEI training with Inlet Barrier Filter System (IBF System) installed, FMS 9.293
OEI training is generally to be performed with both BYPASS sws NORM.
OEI training is possible as long as no amber bargraphs lit on the remote panel.
CAT A training is allowed only with 3 or less green bargraphs illuminated on the remote
panel.
NOTE
A.5.
In case of using the training mode simulating one engine failure the BYPASS
door(s) will not be set to OPEN.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Refer to section B, C, D and E of this supplement.
9.1-8 8
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2
A.6.
A.7.
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
The OEI training mode is implemented to perform a realistic OEI training. This training
mode is based on a twin engine training concept featuring a so called TRAINING and a
TRAINING IDLE engine.
The training mode is designed in a way that engine acceleration/deceleration and NRO
governing reflects a real OEI situation. Control mode of both engines in training is integral.
The combined power of both engines in training mode will simulate the maximum power
of the 30 sec/ 2 min rating as long as the pilot operates within normal limitations. Topping
functions automatically limit the 30 sec. and 2 min. power. The load will be equally distributed between both engines.
If the engine is operated within the normal NRO range necessary for training, the torque
topping is set at a constant value of approx. 2 x 64% (30 sec.), respectively 2 x 62.5% (2
min.).
If during OEI training mode operation the RPM decreases down to 92% NRO, the training
mode is automatically deactivated.
EFFECTIVITY
The rotorspeed is increased to its nominal (reference) value in a controlled manner while
the torque of the engines is limited to an acceptable level (approximately 2 x 75%, for not
more than 10 seconds), in order to avoid excessive torque and rotorspeed overshoots.
EFFECTIVITY
The rotorspeed is increased to its nominal (reference) value in a controlled manner while
the torque of the engines is limited to an acceptable level (approximately 2 x 82%, for not
more than 5 seconds), in order to avoid excessive torque and rotorspeed overshoots.
EFFECTIVITY
All
While the FLI pointer simulates OEI the real engine parameters are available as digital
values on both sides of the FLI gauge (see Fig. A1).
EFFECTIVITY
Before FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters up
to S/N 1224 and before SB EC135-31-081
If during OEI training mode operation the ENG MAIN selector switch (of the engine in
TRAIN IDLE) is set back to FLIGHT, an AEO torque topping at a constant value of 2 x
75% is activated for a duration of not more than 10 seconds (with TRAINING selector
switch ON), in order to avoid excessive torque overshoot when training has to be aborted
at low RPM.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 9
EFFECTIVITY
After FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters up to
S/N 1224 and before SB EC135-31-081
If during OEI training mode operation the ENG MAIN selector switch (of the engine in
TRAIN IDLE) is set back to FLIGHT, an AEO torque topping at a constant value of 2 x
82% is activated for a duration of not more than 5 seconds (with TRAINING selector
switch ON), in order to avoid excessive torque overshoot when training has to be aborted
at low RPM.
EFFECTIVITY
After FADEC upgrade (TU 146) has been implemented and for helicopters with
S/N 1225 and subsequent or after SB EC13531081
If during OEI training mode operation the TRAIN sw toggling to SEL or switching TRAIN
to OFF and RPM falls below 92% the FADEC aborts the training mode. Both engines will
return to FLIGHT.
EFFECTIVITY
If the training selector switch is set back to OFF position before the engine main selector has been switched back in the FLIGHT position, the OEI training mode is latched by
a relay, in order to avoid an unintended change of the TRAINING IDLE engine into real
idle condition. If the OEI training mode operation is ended in a wrong switching sequence
the relay will hold the training status and both engines will remain in training mode. In this
case, place the respective ENG MAIN switch from IDLE to FLIGHT position to end
training mode.
EFFECTIVITY
The training mode is controlled via a three position TRAIN switch (OFF ARM SEL).
OFF and ARM are fix positions, SEL is a spring loaded toggle position which means that
after each toggle from ARM to SEL, the switch returns to ARM position. Setting the
TRAIN switch to ARM preselects and arms the training mode. The actual training is
activated via the following toggle sequences:
Toggling from ARM to SEL triggers a FADEC driven simulated OEI of engine number
2.
Toggling again from ARM to SEL sets the engine number 2 back to FLIGHT. This
means training mode is off but still armed.
Toggling again from ARM to SEL triggers the simulated OEI of engine 1.
and so on.
Putting the TRAIN swich back to OFF terminates the training procedure.
EFFECTIVITY
All
In case of real engine failure during OEI training mode operation, the remaining engine
automatically turns to a power setting as required.
9.1-8 10
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
TRAIN
TRAINING
IDLE
EC135_FLH_0320_R
OEI LO
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 11
9.1-8 12
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
B.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for engine failure simulation during takeoff and landing.
B.2.
LIMITATIONS
B.2.1.
MASS LIMITATION
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions, refer to the diagrams of subsection C (Fig. C1).
NOTE
When sandfilter installed refer to Fig. C 2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. C 3.
B.3.
B.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement. Takeoff and landing training procedures must be
performed according to the basic Flight Manual, para 4.7 and 4.9.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 13
C.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for Category A training operations at
CLEAR HELIPORTS.
When simulating OEI operation, follow the emergency procedures of Category A operations (FMS 9.15, subsection B) and use the GENERAL CAT A Limitations (FMS 9.15,
subsection A) and the gross mass value from the TRAINING WAT curve of this subsection (Fig. C1 or, if sandfilter is installed, Fig. C2 or, if IBF System is installed, Fig. C3).
C.2.
LIMITATIONS
C.2.1.
MASS LIMITATIONS
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions during Category A (clear heliport), refer to the diagram of this subsection
(Fig. C1).
NOTE
When sandfilter installed refer to Fig. C 2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. C 3.
9.1-8 14
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
EXAMPLE:
Determine:
Known:
OAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 _C
Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5000 ft
External Optional Equipment . . . . . . External Loudspeaker ( 50 kg)
Solution:
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 15
Fig. C1 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport)
9.1-8 16
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
Fig. C2 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport) - Sandfilter
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 17
Fig. C3 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (clear heliport) - IBF System
9.1-8 18
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
C.3.
C.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement.
C.5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
In FMS 9.15, subsection B, the figures B10 (Rejected Takeoff Distance Required), B11
(continued takeoff distance required) and B14 (landing distance from 50 ft height to a
complete stop on the ground) are not valid for CAT A Clear Heliport Training.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 19
9.1-8 20
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
D.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for Category A training operations at
SURFACE LEVEL OR ELEVATED HELIPORTS.
When simulating OEI operation, follow the emergency procedures of Category A operations (FMS 9.15 subsection C), and use the GENERAL CAT A Limitations (FMS 9.15,
subsection A) and the gross mass value from the TRAINING WAT curve of this subsection (Fig. D1 or, if sandfilter is installed, Fig. D2)
D.2.
LIMITATIONS
D.2.1.
MASS LIMITATIONS
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions during Category A (VTOL (1) SURFACE LEVEL OR ELEVATED HELIPORTS), refer to the diagram (Fig. D1) of this subsection.
NOTE
When sandfilter is installed refer to Fig. D2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. D1.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 21
EXAMPLE:
For helicopter with external optional equipment installed (Fig. C1; D1)
Determine:
Known:
OAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 _C
Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 ft
External Optional Equipment . . . . . . External Loudspeaker ( 50 kg)
Solution:
9.1-8 22
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
NOTE
9.1-8 23
Fig. D2 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (VTOL) - Sandfilter
9.1-8 24
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
D.3.
D.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement.
D.5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change to Flight Manual Supplement 9.15 subsection C.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 25
E.1.
GENERAL
This subsection provides information necessary for Category A training operations at
SHORT FIELD OR CONFINED HELIPORT.
When simulating OEI operation, follow the emergency procedures of Category A operations (FMS 9.15 subsection D E), and use the GENERAL CAT A Limitations (FMS
9.15, subsection A) and the gross mass value from the TRAINING WAT curve of this
subsection (Fig. E1 or, if sandfilter is installed, Fig. E2).
E.2.
LIMITATIONS
E.2.1.
MASS LIMITATIONS
For determining the training takeoff and landing gross mass in order to simulate OEI
conditions during Category A (VTOL (2) OR (3) SHORT FIELD OR CONFINED HELIPORT), refer to the diagram (Fig. E1) of this subsection.
NOTE
When sandfilter is installed refer to Fig. E2 or, if IBF System installed refer to Fig. E1.
9.1-8 26
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
EXAMPLE:
For helicopter with external optional equipment installed (Fig. C1; E1)
Determine:
Known:
OAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 _C
Pressure altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5000 ft
External Optional Equipment . . . . . . External Loudspeaker ( 50 kg)
Solution:
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 27
NOTE
9.1-8 28
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
Fig. E2 Training takeoff and landing gross mass CAT A (VTOL) - Sandfilter
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2
9.1-8 29
E.3.
E.4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Refer to para A.4. of this supplement.
NOTE
E.5.
For gross mass values between WAT gross mass and 35 kg below:
After OEI training mode activation, a high initial rate of descent can be expected, and OEI training mode may be deactivated automatically.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change to Flight Manual Supplement 9.15 subsections D, E.
9.1-8 30
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2
S E C T I O N 9.2
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
AC Power System
9.2-4
Third issue
9.2-83
Third issue
9.2-38
Third issue
9.2-26
Third issue
9.2-48
Third issue
9.2-24
9.2-79
Third issue
Cabin/Cargo Compartment
Separation
9.2-32
Third issue
9.2-33
Third issue
9.2-74
Third issue
9.2-80
Third issue
Door Jettisoning
9.2-61
Third issue
Dual Controls
9.2-2
Third issue
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 1
Rev. 2.1
Rev. 3
Rev. 3
Rev. 3
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 0
Rev. 0
Rev. 2
Rev. 0
Rev. 0.2
9.2 i
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
Third issue
9.2-3
9.2-47
9.2-118
9.2-44
Third issue
9.2-46
Third issue
9.2-115
Rev. 0
9.2-106
9.2-67
Third issue
9.2-91
Third issue
9.2-96
9.2-84
9.2-19
External Loudspeaker
9.2-18
Third issue
9.2-20
Rev. 3.1
9.2-117
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 0
Rev. 8
Rev. 0
Rev. 4
Rev. 1
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 6
Rev. 0
Rev. 1
Third issue
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 6
Rev. 1
9.2 ii
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
9.2-9
Third issue
9.2-11
Third issue
9.2-72
Third issue
9.2-49
Third issue
9.2-60
Third issue
FLOICE 105
9.2-98
9.2-10
Third issue
9.2-45
Third issue
9.2-89
Third issue
9.2-92
Third issue
9.2-101
9.2-63
Fuzz Burner
9.2-7
9.2-70
Third issue
9.2-78
Third issue
9.2-73
Third issue
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
Rev. 3
Rev. 2
Rev. 1
Rev. 2
Rev. 3
Rev. 0
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 3
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 2
Third issue
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 3.1
9.2 iii
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
9.2-81
Third issue
9.2-77
Third issue
9.2-111
9.2-112
9.2-116
Rev. 4.1
Rev. 3
Rev. 0.2
Rev. 1
Rev. 0
HF 9000 Communication
System
9.2-90
9.2-104
Rev. 1.1
9.2-22
Rev. 2
9.2-102
Rev. 0.1
9.2-75
9.2-93
9.2-94
Third issue
9.2-68
Third issue
9.2-35
Third issue
9.2-69
Third issue
9.2-29
Third issue
9.2-99
9.2 iv
Third issue
Rev. 1
Third issue
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 2
Rev. 5
Rev. 1
Rev. 0
Rev. 1
Rev. 0
Rev. 1.1
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58
9.2-76
Third issue
Navigation Management
System CMA3000
9.2-50
Third issue
Navigation Management
System CMA9000
9.2-87
Third issue
9.2-86
Third issue
P&R SAS
9.2-5
Third issue
9.2-85
Third issue
9.2-25
Third issue
9.2-113
Rev. 0
Rev. 1
Rev. 5
Rev. 6.1
Rev. 4
Rev. 0
Rev. 2
Rev. 1
9.2-27
9.2-39
9.2-8
Third issue
9.2-13
Third issue
9.2-52
Third issue
9.2-103
Rev. 1
9.2-31
Third issue
9.2-66
Third issue
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
Third issue
Rev. 0
Rev. 3
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 2
Rev. 2
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 0
9.2 v
NAME OF EQUIPMENT
FMS
NUMBER
FIRST APPROVAL
Valid Revision
Settling Protectors
9.2-6
Third issue
9.2-53
Third issue
9.2-56
Third issue
Snow Skids
9.2-41
Third issue
9.2-54
Third issue
9.2-51
Third issue
9.2-59
Third issue
Strobe Lights
9.2-16
Third issue
TACAN System
9.2-95
Third issue
9.2-108
9.2-37
9.2-40
Third issue
9.2-82
Third issue
Windshield Wiper/Washing
System
9.2-55
Third issue
9.2-17
Third issue
9.2-97
9.2 vi
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 2
Rev. 7
Rev. 3
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 2.1
Rev. 1.2
Rev. 0
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 0.1
Rev. 3
Rev. 1
MANUFACTURERS DATA
Rev. 12.1
FMS
9.2-20
SUPPLEMENT FOR
EXTERNAL HOIST SYSTEM LH/RH SIDE
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.2) when the
External Hoist System has been installed.
Effectivity
System/Equipment Designation
External Hoist System (cable length 50m or
90m)
All
All
Date: 13.03.2007
Approved by EASA
9.2-20 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-20 -1
9.2-20 -9
9.2-20 -17
9.2-20 -2
3.1
9.2-20 -10
9.2-20 -18
9.2-20 -3
3.1
9.2-20 -11
9.2-20 -19
9.2-20 -4
9.2-20 -12
9.2-20 -5
9.2-20 -13
9.2-20 -6
9.2-20 -14
9.2-20 -7
9.2-20 -15
9.2-20 -8
9.2-20 -16
Rem
Rev.No.
9.2-20 -20
3.1
9.2-20 -21
3.1
9.2-20 -22
3.1
9.2-20 -23
9.2-20 2
Rem
Page
9.2-20 -24
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 3.1
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE
REVISION
ORIGINAL
3.1
REVISION
1.1
REVISION
2
JUN 11, 2010
(EASA Approval No.: 10030335)
REVISION
3
MAY 09, 2012
(EASA Approval No.: 10039519)
REVISION 3.1
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 3.1
9.2-20 3
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
2.
LIMITATIONS
NOTE
2.1.
Alternate static port shall not be used if the sliding doors are opened.
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
The installed Boarding step/ Multifunction step must be approved for installation in conjunction with the external hoist system.
If the snow skids or skids for the emergency floats are installed in conjunction with the
external hoist system, the respective cable deflector kit and the approved boarding step
must be installed.
Flight operations with opened doors are permissible only when an approved Sliding Door
Locking Device is installed and sliding door curtains, if installed, have been removed.
2.2.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
The external external hoist system is approved under VFR for lifting external loads which
are jettisonable and which are lifted free of land or water. The load jettisoning (i.e. cable
cut) system must be operational.
9.2-20 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 3
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
5.1.
5.2.
Subtract 40 ft/min
Subtract 30 ft/min
Subtract 25 ft/min
HOIST OPERATION
During hoist operations, the influence of the additional aerodynamic drag on flight
performances, produced by extended boom/cable and attached load, is negligible when
operating helicopter within limitations defined in para. 2 of this supplement.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-20 19
6.
6.1.
6.2.
6.2.1.
The hoist load chart is given as an aid in determining the forward shift of the
longitudinal C.G. caused by picking up an external hoist load.
The chart shows the longitudinal C.G. limits within which the aircraft (without the
external hoist load) must be, before an external hoist load of a given mass is
picked up from the ground.
For helicopter with installed reinforced rear crosstube the C.G. envelope shown
in the FMS 9.225 remains valid.
When intersection point of longitudinal in-flight C.G. with helicopter gross mass is located
within inner C.G. envelope corresponding to hoist load, the C.G. of helicopter will remain
within permissible range when load is picked up.
EXAMPLE:
Fig.3
Determine:
Known:
Solution:
4350 mm
200 kg
9.2-20 20
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 3.1
6.2.2.
Max. allowable hoist load for a given in-flight C.G. and gross mass
Max. allowable hoist load is indicated by the smallest envelope, which encloses the
intersection point of in-flight gross mass and in-flight C.G.
3000
2800
A:
B:
C:
D:
2600
Gross
Mass
[kg]
2910
2910
1500
1840
STA
[mm]
4227
4369
4570
4180
GROSS MASS kg
2400
2200
2000
EC135_FLH_0624_R
1800
1600
1400
4150
4200
4250
4300
4350
4400
4450
4500
4550
4600
XSTA mm
Fig. 3
6.3.
LATERAL C.G.
The lateral C.G. will normally be within its limitations (refer to para. 2.5.2) when standard
loading practises/ configurations are used and
pilots and copilots seats are occupied and hoist operator(s) with a maximum total
weight of 180 kg standing at the hoist position.
only the pilots seat is occupied and
for L/H side hoist installation, hoist operator(s) with a maximum total weight of
200 kg standing at the hoist position.
for R/H side hoist installation, hoist operator(s) with a maximum total weight of
120 kg standing at the hoist position.
If different configurations or non standard loading practises/ configurations are used
(i.e. aircraft loading configurations where the weight is not evenly spread left/ right), the
lateral C.G. should be determined before starting the hoist operation.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 3.1
9.2-20 21
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The external hoist system is attached with quick-release pins to the LH or RH side of the
main gear box deck. It provides lifting capability via a boom mounted, motor driven hoist.
The external hoist system consists of the hoist unit, a cable cutter assembly, an electric
driven swinging boom and a control pendant.
7.1.
HOIST UNIT
The hoist unit comprises all the driving mechanisms and safety devices required for
proper operation, namely:
Drive motor supplied with 28V DC providing continous operation up to 12000 RPM.
Translating cable drum to ensure correct and even winding of the cable on the drum.
Braking system consisting of friction and brake disks and a pressure plate. The oil
pump provides oil flow to cool the slipping clutch plates and the automatic brake.
A traction sheave assembly provides a constant minimum tension on the cable at all
times to prevent miswrap during no-load operation.
Automatic electric stop mechanism, operating when cable is fully reeled in and reeled
out.
Automatic hoist motor speed reduction when the cable is within 3 m (10 ft) before
fully reeled in or 3 m (10 ft) before fully reeled out.
7.2.
CABLE CUTTER
7.2.1.
7.2.2.
9.2-20 22
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 3.1
FMS
9.2-58
SUPPLEMENT FOR
MEDIUM AIRCRAFT RECORDING AND MONITORING SYSTEM
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.2) when the
MEDIUM AIRCRAFT RECORDING AND MONITORING SYSTEM has been installed.
System/Equipment Designation
Effectivity
All
All
All
Date: 21.02.2006
Approved by EASA
9.2-58 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-58 -1
0.1
9.2-58 -5
2.1
9.2-58 -9
2.1
9.2-58 -2
2.1
9.2-58 -6
2.1
9.2-58 -10
2.1
9.2-58 -3
2.1
9.2-58 -7
2.1
9.2-58 -4
2.1
9.2-58 -8
2.1
Rem
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-58 -11
2.1
9.2-58 -14
2.1
9.2-58 -17
2.1
9.2-58 -12
2.1
9.2-58 -15
2.1
9.2-58 -18
2.1
9.2-58 -13
2.1
9.2-58 -16
2.1
Rem
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE
ORIGINAL
REVISION
0.1
REVISION
0.2
REVISION
2
JAN 24, 2012
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10038159)
REVISION
2.1
REVISION
1
FEB 02, 2008
(EASA APPROVAL NO. R.A.01430)
REVISION 2.1
9.2-58 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
The Medium Aircraft Recording and Monitoring System (MARMS) is built-up as a
modular system. Therefore the CVFDR and UMS (ACMS) can be installed and operated
independently from each other. The following installation combinations are possible:
1.1.
ABBREVIATIONS
A
ACMS
CP
CVFDR
CVR
- Control Panel
- Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder
- Cockpit Voice Recorder
DTU
EPC
FDR
GSE
HUMS
MARMS
MFDAU
N1
N2
NR
PCMCIA
QAR
SSCVFDR
ULB
UMS
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 3
2.
LIMITATIONS
The CVFDR can be used only when FCDS (FMS 9.2-49 or FMS 9.2-53 or FMS 9.2-60)
and AFCS (FMS 9.2-48) is installed.
3.
The color of the amber CVR and FDR lights on the control panel has been
slightly changed towards yellow so as to be compatible with Night Vision
Goggles.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1.
PRE-START CHECK
CVFDR
CVFDR 1/2 or MARMS 1/2 circuit breaker
Check in
Check in
UMS
4.2.
Check in
Check in
SYSTEM TESTS
CVFDR
EFFECTIVITY
When power is applied to the CVFDR automatically a builtin test will be performed
during which the HUMS and FDR lights illuminate shortly. After the test, these lights
should be extinguished indicating a serviceable CVFDR.
EFFECTIVITY
When power is applied to the CVFDR automatically a built-in test will be performed
during which the FDR light illuminates shortly. After the test, this light should be
extinguished indicating a serviceable CVFDR.
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-58 4
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
If a failure has been detected during one of the above tests, the yellow FDR and/or CVR
light(s) come(s) on (see also failure procedure in section 8 of this supplement). The crew
has the possibility to initialize the test again for the CVR part by pressing the TEST
button on the CP.
UMS
When power is applied to the UMS a built-in test will be performed during which the
HUMS light illuminates shortly. After test, this light should be extinguished indicating a
serviceable UMS.
An absence of dialog between MFDAU and CP, which is checked automatically, or an
ACMS software failure, will result in a NO DATA FROM HUMS message and HUMS light
on the CP.
CP
on
OPERATION
The MARMS is energized when the aircraft on-board electrical system is switched on.
CVFDR
The CVFDR automatically starts recording the voice and flight data after successful
start-up test. Failure that occurs during operation will be indicated by the illumination of
the yellow FDR and/or CVR light.
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR Honeywell
The CVFDR stops recording after the system power is cut off (or in case of crash or
immersion).
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR L3COM
The CVFDR continues recording for 10 minutes after the system power is cut off via BAT
MSTR sw or circuit breakers. In case of crash or immersion, recording stops immediately.
EFFECTIVITY
All
UMS
The UMS starts operation when start conditions are reached (starting of first engine and
reaching a specific N1 threshold). It stops operation when stop conditions are reached
(both engines and rotor stopped).
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 5
4.4.
POSTFLIGHT PROCEDURE
4.4.1.
The CVFDR audio recording can be erased after flight. This procedure requires
two people. The recorded flight data can not be erased.
CAD
BAT MSTR sw
Check ON
CVR ERASE pb
Push
simultaneously
Safety voice erase unit (cargo compartment)
NOTE
When the erase procedure was successful, an aural tone will be generated and
transmitted via the headset that is plugged in the CVR audio test plug.
BAT MSTR sw
4.4.2.
OFF
9.2-58 6
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
FLIGHT DATA
When the flight data has been transferred automatically, the data should be validated by
the pilot. Therefore the pilot must change to the FLIGHT DATA menu by means of the
on
keys the
BACK key and to enter the menu by means of the ENTER key. With the
pilot goes through the flight data. Each data can be invalidated by the pilot, pressing the
ENTER key (status changes from yes (Y) to no (N)). At the end of the flight the FLIGHT
DATA menu an ACKNOWLEDGE page allows to lock the flight data by pressing the
ENTER key. When the data are locked, it is impossible to go back to the flight menu to
modify them. After acknowledgement done, the DATA TRANSFER procedure has to be
done again manually.
The flight data directory contains at least 10 pages and a maximum dependant on the
number of exceedances.
The following tables show the possible types of displayed data:
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 7
page 1
page 4
page 3
page 6 NR Exceed
XX.XX
no exceedance . . . . . . . none
N1 (1 or 2) . . . . . . MCP, MTOP,
OEILO, OEIHI
N2 (1 or 2) . . . . . . . TRANS
Last page
Enables the crew to confirm the end of validation of the data
recorded during the flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGE
Validation in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGERUN
Validation completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGEDONE
Validation fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGEFAIL
9.2-58 8
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
page 1
Flight time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIRBORNE
page 3
page 6 NR Exceed
XX.XX
TQ (1 or 2) MTOP M
TQ (1 or 2) MTOP E
TQ (1 or 2) TRANS M
TQ (1 or 2) OEILO M
TQ (1 or 2) OEIHI M
TQ (1 or 2) OEIMX M
OEI ENG
TQ (1 or 2) OEI E
TQ (1 or 2) OEIMX E
TOT (1 or 2)
N1 (1 or 2)
N2 (1 or 2)
AEOOEI, OVSPD
no exceedance . . . . . . . none
Last page
Enables the crew to confirm the end of validation of the data
recorded during the flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGE
Validation in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGERUN
Validation completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGEDONE
Validation fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACKNOWLEDGEFAIL
EFFECTIVITY All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 9
4.4.3.
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change in the basic Flight Manual data.
9.2-58 10
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 2.1
6.
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
7.1.
GENERAL
The Medium Aircraft Recording and Monitoring System (MARMS) provides the following
main functions:
the usage monitoring of the airframe, the rotor, the transmission, the engines and the
cargo hook as well as an overall aircraft behaviour monitoring by means of the
Usage Monitoring system (UMS).
(optional) the aquisition and storage of the most important flight parameters by
means of the Quick Access Recorder (QAR).
a combined Solid State Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder (SSCVFDR), located
in the tail boom,
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR L3COM
a combined Solid State Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder (SSCVFDR), located
on the tail boom inside the LH engine cowling,
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR Honeywell
All
a Safety Voice Erase Unit, located in the right rear part of the cargo compartment.
a DTU which records the UMS data on a PCMCIA card, located in the middle
console
A UMCard software: The UMCard is delivered as a basic ground analysis tool for
the UMS. It is delivered on CD-ROM and requests a PC equipped with Windows.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 11
a Miscellaneous Flight Data Acquisition Unit (MFDAU), located on the avionics deck,
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-58 12
two Miscellaneous Flight Data Acquisition Units (MFDAU) (one for CVFDR, one for
ACMS), located on the avionics deck,
EFFECTIVITY
All
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2.1
On Ground
MFDAU
CVFDR
(Honeywell)
OR
GSE
DTU
PCMCIA
QAR Function (optional) Card
MARMS global architecture on bord and on ground
CVFDR
(L3COM)
Control Panel
Basis
9.2-58 13
7.2.
the audio signals in the cockpit, created by pilot, copilot and passengers via the
INTERCOM system or an additional summing amplifier (optional) or recorded by the
area microphone, located in the lower left part of the instrument panel, and
stick position
pedal position
collective position
rotor speed
The recording time for the FD recorder is 10 hours / 25 hours (depends on recorder
type), and for the CV recorder 60 minutes / 120 minutes (depends on recorder type).
After that time, when the memories have not been cleared, the memories will be
overwritten by the following records.
In case of an aircraft crash, an immersion and impact detector stops recording by cutting
the power supply. An acoustic locator beacon, installed on the front panel of the recorder,
emits a signal which enables to localize the SSCVFDR in case of immersion.
7.2.1.
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR Honeywell
D The flight and voice data can be downloaded via the readout connector
10UCA.
EFFECTIVITY
CVFDR L3COM
D The flight and voice data can be downloaded via a connector on the CVFDR.
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-58 14
All
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2.1
7.3.
engine and airframe exceedances (N1, N2, TOT, TQ, NR, MMO)
number of landings
engine cycles
rotor speed
torque
mast moment
engine parameters
At the end of the flight, the recorded data are stored on the standard PCMCIA memory
card, which is necessary for on ground analysis. Two ground analysis tools are available:
The UMCard, delivered as standard ground analysis tool for UMS, is used to display
the flight report and to store the flight data
The PGS software is used to analyse the parameters recorded by the QAR
7.3.1.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 15
7.4.
CONTROL PANEL
1
5
6
13
No.
12
11
10
LABEL/
DESCRIPTION
Display screen
Menus zone
displays:
S the menus, selections and the results on two lines centered on
the middle of the screen.
S the number of the page displayed at the bottom RH side of the
screen,
S the DTU status messages in the Scratch Pad zone.
displays the menus, the selections and the results.
EVENT pb
ERASE pb
TEST
CVR light
FDR light
HUMS light
ENTER key
10
Scratchpad zone
provides:
S management of option type (Y/N) fields
S switching to a sub-directory
S activation of a control
on the ground only (engines and rotors stopped):
S displays the status of the DTU and the memory card.
S displays TRANSFER message when the last flight has not yet
been transferred.
9.2-58 16
Function
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2.1
11
Keys:
oand n
providing:
initiation of the control unit self test by simultaneously pressing
both keys (for more than 5 s)
o n
12
Dashed line
or
keys:
by pressing the
S switching from one field to another,
S switching to the next page when positioned on the last
selectable field on the page, or to the previous page when
positioned on the first selectable field on the page.
permanently displayed on the screen.
13
BACK key
8.
8.1.
Check in
BAT MSTR sw
Repower
Test plug (beside control panel or bottom of slant Plug in a 600 headset
console on pilots side)
Control panel
EFFECTIVITY
Check if the yellow FDR and HUMS lights come on shortly and disappear, indicating that
the system operation has been recovered. If not, (FDR and/or CVR lights remain on),
report the problem to the maintenance team. If a failure occurs during flight, continue
flight and report the problem to the maintenance team.
EFFECTIVITY
Check if the yellow FDR light comes on shortly and disappears, indicating that the
system operation has been recovered. If not, (FDR and/or CVR lights remain on), report
the problem to the maintenance team. If a failure occurs during flight, continue flight and
report the problem to the maintenance team.
EFFECTIVITY
All
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 2.1
9.2-58 17
8.2.
Check in
Check in
BAT MSTR sw
Repower
Check powered
Check if the yellow HUMS light comes on shortly and disappears, indicating that the
system operation has been recovered. If not, (HUMS light and NO DATA FROM HUMS
remain on), report the problem to the maintenance team. If a failure occurs during flight,
continue flight and report the problem to the maintenance team.
9.2-58 18
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 2.1
FMS
9.2-59
SUPPLEMENT FOR
STANDARD COCKPIT ILLUMINATION
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 / EC 635 Flight Manual (Section 9.2)
when the Standard cockpit illumination has been installed.
System/Equipment Designation
Standard cockpit illumination
Date: 18.02.2008
Effectivity
All
Approved by EASA
9.2-59 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
The column Approved by which is only shown for approved pages shows either the
approving authority (e.g. EASA) or, in case of minor changes according to DOA No.
EASA.21J.034, DOA.
LEP approved data (part 1):
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
Remarks/
Effectivity
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
9.2-59 -1
EASA
9.2-59 -4
EASA
9.2-59 -2
DOA
1.2
9.2-59 -5
DOA
1.1
9.2-59 -3
EASA
Remarks/
Effectivity
Rev.No.
9.2-59 -6
1.1
9.2-59 -7 /
( 8 blank)
(-8
1.2
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE / SECOND ISSUE
DATE OF APPROVAL
REVISION
1.2
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
MAY 18, 2012
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10039713)
REVISION
1.1
REVISION 1.2
9.2-59 2
APPROVED
Rev. 1.2
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
With this supplement it has been shown that the installation of the respective system
does not degrade the crew members visual cues in VFR Day and VFR Night flight.
No compliance demonstration has been performed that the installed system complies
with the applicable regulations for NVIS. No changes if any have been introduced which
may be necessary to comply with the applicable regulations.
2.
LIMITATIONS
CAUTION D IF NVG OPERATIONS ARE ENVISAGED, AN AIRWORTHINESS AND
SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONAL APPROVAL BY THE COMPETENT AUTHORITY ARE NECESSARY.
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 1
Compliance demonstration for NVIS in front of the applicable airworthiness requirements has only been shown when the helicopter serial number is listed in
the respective FMA referenced within the FMS 9.286 Night Vision Imaging
Systems (NVIS) /NVG.
9.2-59 3
3.
3.1.
or
9.2-59 4
APPROVED
Rev. 1
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1.
PREFLIGHT CHECK
(TO BE PERFORMED DURING SYSTEM CHECKS ACC. TO BASIC FLM / SEC. 4)
EFFECTIVITY
L INSTR lighting sw
Set as follows:
DAY for day operation
NIGHT or NVG, as required,
for night operation
EFFECTIVITY
L INSTR lighting sw
DAY
L Displays
L INSTR lighting sw
L Displays
EFFECTIVITY
All
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change in the basic Flight Manual data.
APPROVED
Rev. 1.1
9.2-59 5
6.
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Power to the instrument light circuits is controlled by a three-position INSTR lighting
switch (Fig.1) located on the overhead console. With this switch in either the NIGHT or
NVG position, 28 VDC is supplied from the essential bus I via the INSTR LT 1 circuit
breaker to each circuit.
NVG
O
F
F
ON
OR
DAY
N
I
G
H
T NVG
Fig. 1
9.2-59 6
8.
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 1.2
FMS
9.2-82
SUPPLEMENT FOR
WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM RDR 1600
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 / EC 635 Flight Manual (Section 9.2)
when the WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM has been installed.
System/Equipment Designation
Weather radar system
RDR-1600 and VRU
Date: 18.02.2008
Effectivity
All
Approved by EASA
9.2-82 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
The column Approved by which is only shown for approved pages shows either the
approving authority (e.g. EASA) or, in case of minor changes according to DOA No.
EASA.21J.034, DOA.
LEP approved data (part 1):
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
Remarks/
Effectivity
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
9.2-82 -1
EASA
9.2-82 -4
EASA
9.2-82 -2
DOA
0.1
9.2-82 -5
EASA
9.2-82 -3
EASA
Remarks/
Effectivity
Rev.No.
9.2-82 -6
9.2-82 -7
0.1
9.2-82 -8
Rem
Page
9.2-82 -9
(-10 blank)
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
LOG OF REVISIONS
FIRST ISSUE / SECOND ISSUE
DATE OF APPROVAL
ORIGINAL
REVISION
REVISION 0.1
9.2-82 2
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
2.
LIMITATIONS
2.1.
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
The Radome must be installed.
2.2.
PRECAUTIONS
As a rule, the national safety regulations for the operation of radar systems must be
observed.
Operation of the system on ground is only permitted by qualified personnel.
On ground, the weather radar system may only be put into operation if the following
safety distances are observed (see Fig.1)
APPROVED
Rev. 0
100 ft (30 m)
Safety Distances
9.2-82 3
2.3.
OPERATIONAL SAFETY
The weather radar system must not be used during starting and shutting down of the
engines.
WARNING
2.4.
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
The limit for the antenna stabilisation function is $30_ for pitch and roll axis.
2.5.
COMPATIBILITY
The weather radar system (i.e. Radome) degrades significantly the protective capability
of an optionally installed Wire Strike Protection System.
3.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
For detail information it is nessesary to use the RDR 1600 Pilots Guide.
NOTE
WARNING
4.1.
Additional information about the operation of the weather radar system as well
as about the correct interpretation of weather maps must be obtained from the
pilots guide and other additional vendor documentation (see para 8.2).
PREFLIGHT CHECK
Radome
4.2.
Condition
Check in
INV sw
ON
Avionic master sw
ON
ICP
Function selector sw
STBY
9.2-82 4
APPROVED
Rev. 0
NOTE D Operation of the weather radar is dependent upon an operational radar altimeter.
D Allow 2 minutes warmup time for the radar system and the stabilization of the
artificial horizon.
D No display appears in STBY position and there is no radar transmission in
either STBY or TEST.
Function selector sw
TEST
The test pattern appears and is scanned over 120_. For the test, the 80-mile range is
selected.
The color bands in the test pattern must correspond to those described in the respective vendor documentation (see para.8.2). FAULT and TEST appear on the screen.
Brightness control
Check function
Function selector sw
OFF
NOTE
4.3.
OPERATION
NOTE
If the radar altimeter has detected a height below 50 ft AGL, the Weather Radar
System will be set to STBY mode automatically.
To operate the system proceed as described in para 4.2, system checks, until the
function selector switch has been set to STBY, then after 2 minutes warmup time and
after reaching 50 ft AGL:
Function selector sw
4.4.
WARNING
Function selector sw
5.
OFF
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change in the basic Flight Manual data.
APPROVED
Rev. 0
9.2-82 5
6.
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
For detail information it is nessesary to use the RDR 1600 Pilots Guide.
The helicopters weather radar system is mainly used to recognize in time meteorological danger areas. e.g. storm fronts and areas of great turbulences. Such areas must be
avoided or flown through at the right place.
It is also suitable, day and night, even under adverse conditions, as a navigation aid
which indicates topographical contours, e.g. islands, coastlines, waterways, bridges and
oil drilling platforms.
The weather radar system consists of a control panel CP113K (see Fig. 2), a
Receiver/transmitter, an antenna drive unit incl. antenna and an indicator (FCDS via
VRU).
Fig. 2
9.2-82 6
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 0
switch (version):
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-82 7
9.2-82 8
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 0
8.
8.1.
HANDLING, MAINTENANCE
8.2.
1.
Operation on ground is only permitted when the safety distances are observed.
2.
3.
Make sure that the radar nose is clean and that the antenna and the waveguide
components are clean and dry.
VENDOR DOCUMENTATION
PILOTS GUIDE RDR-1600
ADDRESS:
TELEPHONICS
Command Systems Division
815 Broad Hollow Road
Farmingdale, NY 11735
USA
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 0
FMS
9.2-86
SUPPLEMENT FOR
NIGHT VISION IMAGING SYSTEMS (NVIS) / NVG
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 / 635 Flight Manual (Section 9.2) when
the following equipment has been installed.
System/Equipment Designation
NVIS/NVG
Effectivity
observe appropriate FMA for
approved configuration
FMA 11 ( )
NOTE
This FMS is valid only in conjunction with the applicable and mandatory FMA.
Approved by EASA
9.2-86 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-86 -1
9.2-86 -4
9.2-86 -7
9.2-86 -2
6.1
9.2-86 -5
9.2-86 -8
9.2-86 -3
6.1
9.2-86 -6
Rem
Rev.No.
9.2-86 -9
9.2-86 -10
Rem
Page
9.2-86 -11
((-12
12 blank)
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE / SECOND ISSUE (NOT PUBLISHED)
THIRD ISSUE (DUE TO FMS HARMONIZATION WITHIN EC 135 / EC 635 FLEET)
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
MAY 28, 2009
(EASA APPROVAL NO. R.C.03368)
REVISION
2
SEP 30, 2010
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10031999)
REVISION
3.1
REVISION
4
FEB 04, 2014
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10048009)
REVISION
5
JUN 09, 2015
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10053602 REV. 1)
REVISION
6
AUG 31, 2015
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10054612)
REVISION
6.1
REVISION
3
FEB 28, 2011
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10034016)
REVISION 6.1
Date: DEC 04, 2015
Revision No. 6.1 to FMS reference revision 6 is approved under authority of DOA No.
EASA.21J.034.
9.2-86 2
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 6.1
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
In this supplement, the term aided will be used to designate flight using NVGs as
visual aid. Unaided will be used to designate flight without using the NVGs.
2.
LIMITATIONS
CAUTION
2.1.
KINDS OF OPERATION
This helicopter is certified for VFR night NVIS operation when the NVIS aircraft lighting system is installed and approved NVGs are used.
Installation of this NVIS does not include or imply approval for flight operation with Night Vision Goggles (NVG).
CAT A VTOL procedures must be conducted with unaided visual reference to the landing
area.
The Operator must have an approval from his or the appropriate civil aviation authority to operate with NVGs.
2.2.
At least one search light or landing light operated via the collective lever control
panel must be operational.
Pitch and Roll SAS and Yaw SAS or AFCS (see FMS 9.25 or FMS 9.248)
FCDS (see FMS 9.260 or FMS 9.253, depends on configuration)
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 6.1
9.2-86 3
Radar altimeter
Fabric glare shield (separating chin bubble and wind screen visual areas)
NVIS friendly position anti collision lights
NVG compatible cabin lights
NVG compatible hand lamp / torch / flashlight
External mirrors must be adjusted not to blind the crew
2.3.
EFFECTIVITY
The FAA requires that an additional crewmember uses NVGs during single-pilot operation
into and out of unimproved sites:
Landing into unimproved sites:
An additional crewmember shall be equipped with and use the same type of NVG during
landing to assist in obstacle identification and clearing.
Takeoff from unimproved sites:
An additional crewmember shall use the same type of NVG during takeoff to assist in obstacle identification and clearance if operational conditions allows (i.e., patient status, etc).
Enroute:
An additional crewmember using NVG is not required when the aircraft is above 300 ft AGL
and in cruise flight.
EFFECTIVITY
2.4.
All
OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS
NVIS operation must be conducted such that immediate transition to normal (unaided) VFR
night flight is safely possible at any time.
The Utility Light with NVG WHITE sw installed shall be operated in NVG mode only.
2.5.
APPROVED NVGs
CAUTION
The Crew has to be familiar with the use of the NVG equipment.
NOTE
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-86 4
The NVGs ITT F4949 (MX10160 (F9800 series), option J or P), Class B Filter and
NOGALIGHT NL-93 (XD4 or XR5), Class B Filter have demonstrated the compatibility with
the aircraft lighting system.
EFFECTIVITY
The NVGs ITT F4949 (MX10160 (F9800 series), option J or P), Class B Filter
has demonstrated the compatibility with the aircraft lighting system.
EFFECTIVITY
2.6.
All
INCOMPATIBLE LIGHTS
Lights which are not compatible with NVG must remain off during NVIS operations (e.g. additional cabin lighting, nonmission essential radios, etc.).
During approach and landing into unapproved sites it is highly recommended to switch off
strong light sources in the cabin.
EFFECTIVITY
During approach and landing into unimproved sites it is highly recommended to switch off
strong light sources in the cabin.
EFFECTIVITY
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-86 5
3.
3.1.
It is always pilots decision to continue or abort the use of NVG based on the
emergency situation.
ON
Glare can be reduced by turning the NVG away from the instrument panel.
Outside visibility can be kept by looking underneath the goggles (unaided).
AT SAFE HEIGHT
1. Safe flight conditions
Establish
9.2-86 6
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
3.2.
FAILURE OF NVG
Condition/ Indication
AT SAFE HEIGHT
Procedure
1. Safe flight conditions
Establish
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
9.2-86 7
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1.
NVIS OPERATION
Battery check
NOTE
For detailed information about the usage of the NVG observe the Manufacturers
Manual.
4.1.2. L Preflight check (to be performed during system checks acc. to Basic
FLM / Sec. 4 )
External mirror(s)
NVG
INSTR lighting sw
NVG
NVIS lighting
Check function,
and adjust
OFF
compatibility
S/L Light
Strobe Lights
OFF
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change in the Flight Manual data.
9.2-86 8
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 5
6.
7.
7.1.
OFF
OFF
OFF
A
U
T
O
O
N
ON
ARM
DC TEST
CARGO
HOOK
WINCH
CBL CTRL
AUX TK
FUEL
DAY
N
I
G
H
T
DAY
OFF
N
I
G
H
T
LO
HI
LO
HI
STBY HOR
P
A
X
ON
NVG
CAR/PAX
INSTR
LIGHTS
OFF
NVG
Fig. 1
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 3
TRAIN
ON
VENT
ENG 1
CONTROL
9.2-86 9
7.2.
CABIN LIGHTING
For NVIS operation the INSTR LIGHTS sw (on the overhead panel) has to be in NVG
position.
w Control of passenger reading lights (optional):
7.3.
Position OFF
Position PAX
Position ON
Fig. 2
9.2-86 10
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 3
8.
8.1.
Establish
2. Secondary battery
ON
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 0
FMS
9.2-99
SUPPLEMENT FOR
MECHANICAL AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 / EC 635 Flight Manual (Section 9.2)
when the Mechanical Air Conditioning Unit has been installed.
System/Equipment Designation
Effectivity
S/N831;
S/N864;
S/N870 and subsequent
Approved by EASA
APPROVED
Rev. 0
9.2-99 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
The column Approved by which is only shown for approved pages shows either the
approving authority (e.g. EASA) or, in case of minor changes according to DOA No.
EASA.21J.034, DOA.
LEP approved data (part 1):
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
Remarks/
Effectivity
Page
Approved Rev
by
No.
9.2-99 -1
EASA
9.2-99 -5
EASA
9.2-99 -2
DOA
1.1
9.2-99 -6
EASA
9.2-99 -3
DOA
1.1
9.2-99 -7
EASA
9.2-99 -4
EASA
9.2-99 -8
EASA
Remarks/
Effectivity
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-99 -9
9.2-99 -12
9.2-99 -10
1.1
9.2-99 -13
9.2-99 -11
9.2-99 -14
9.2-99 2
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
APPROVED
Rev. 1.1
LOG OF REVISION
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
MAR 18, 2015
(EASA APPROVAL NO. 10025837)
REVISION
1.1
REVISION 1.1
APPROVED
Rev. 1.1
9.2-99 3
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
2.
LIMITATIONS
No change in the basic Flight Manual data.
3.
CPDS OVHT
(MISC)
Conditions/Indications
Normal operating temperature of CPDS exceeded
Procedure
1. Air Distribution Knob
CPDS
Pull
Turn to MAX
9.2-99 4
APPROVED
Rev. 0
CAUTION INDICATIONS
GEN DISCON
and/or
GEN DISCON
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
refer to section 3 of the basic FLM
GEN OVHT
and/or
GEN OVHT
(SYSTEM I)
(SYSTEM II)
refer to section 3 of the basic FLM
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 0
9.2-99 5
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
4.1.
In case of cockpit blower failure check c/b VENT SYS PWR and/or c/b VENT
SYST PWR engaged. For blower reactivation pull and push c/b VENT SYST
CONT.
PREFLIGHT CHECK
Equipment Compartment-LH:
1.
4.2.
SYSTEM CHECK
NOTE
1.
Turn on
2.
ON
3.
Check on
4.
Check operative
4.3.
5.
OFF
6.
Check off
7.
Set as required
OPERATION
NOTE
4.3.1.
Operating the air conditioning unit without activating the ventilation system
(cockpit and/or pax blower) by the VENT SYS rheostat could cause an automatic system shut down.
Normal operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
9.2-99 6
Turn on
ON
Check on
Set as desired
APPROVED
Rev. 0
4.3.2.
Defogging
In case of misted or iced windows proceed as follows:
Air Circulation Knob
Air Distribution Knob
Ventilation system blower
AIR COND switch
Air outlets Instrument panel
Air outlets cabin, frame outlets if possible
NOTE
Pull
Defog
Set maximum
ON
Close
Close
If necassary use the bleed air heating system (additional) for defogging (refer to
FMS 9.214 or sec. 4 of the basic Flight Manual, depending on the H/C variant).
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
5.1.
9.2-99 7
9.2-99 8
APPROVED
Rev. 1
6.
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
7.1.
OEI operation
Overpressure of the refrigerant loop due to system failure or OAT above 50_C, if the
pressure reaches the normal value the system restarts automatically
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-99 9
7.2.1.
Overhead panel
EC135_FLH_0342_R
7.2.
OFF
ON
O
F
F
ON
AIR
COND
Fig. 1
ENABLE
PAX
BLW
VENT SYS
An integrated pressure switch deselects power to the compressor assy in the event of
system over- or under-pressure.
A thermoswitch activates the variable blower automatically, depending on the air
temperature inside the instrument panel, to cool the CPDS.
7.2.2.
Center console
Distribution Flap Knob
EC135_FLH_0343_R
Crew
Defog
CPDS
If the distribution knob is pulled the CPDS recieves also cold air.
If the distribution knob is pushed the crew recieves also cold air.
If the distribution knob is in the Defog or Crew position the heating system is enabled.
If the distribution knob is in the CPDS position the heating system is disabled.
Fig. 2
9.2-99 10
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1.1
EC135_FLH_0344_R
Fresh air
Circulating air
Fig. 3
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-99 11
7.3.
SCHEMATIC
Fig. 4
9.2-99 12
Fig. 5
Mechanical Air Conditioning Unit schematic / cabin roof area typicall installation
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-99 13
Compressor
BeltDrive
from MGB
EVAP+FAN
Cabin
EC135_FLH_0345_R
SOV
EVAP+FAN
Cockpit
Fig. 6
9.2-99 14
Condenser +
2 Fans +
Rec./Dryer
Refrigerant
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1
FMS
9.2-112
SUPPLEMENT FOR
GARMIN GTN 650/750 SPIFR/DPIFR SBAS
NOTE
For operation of Garmin GTN 650 and/or GTN 750 SPIFD/DPIFR without SBAS
functions refer to FMS 9.2-111.
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.2) when the
Garmin GTN 650 and/or GTN 750, FCDS and AFCS are installed.
It shall be used in conjunction with the Pilots Guide for the Garmin GTN 650 and/or
GTN 750. The appropriate revision of the Pilots Guide should be available to the flight
crew.
System/Equipment Designation
Garmin GTN 650, Garmin GTN 750
Effectivity
All
Approved by EASA
9.2-112 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and
dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of
Revisions as necessary.
The column Approved by which is only shown for approved pages shows either the
approving authority (e.g. EASA) or, in case of minor changes according to DOA No.
EASA.21J.034, DOA.
LEP approved data (part 1):
Page
9.2- 112- 1
Approved
by
DOA
Rev.
No.
0.1
9.2- 112- 2
EASA
9.2- 112- 3
Remarks/
Effectivity
Page
9.2-112 - 21
Approved
by
DOA
Rev.
No.
0.1
9.2-112 - 22
DOA
0.1
EASA
9.2-112 - 23
DOA
0.1
9.2- 112- 4
EASA
9.2-112 - 24
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 5
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 25
DOA
0.1
9.2- 112- 6
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 26
DOA
0.1
9.2- 112- 7
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 27
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 8
DOA
0.1
9.2-112- 28
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 9
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 29
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 10
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 30
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 11
EASA
9.2-112- 31
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 12
EASA
9.2-112 - 32
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 13
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 33
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 14
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 34
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 15
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 35
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 16
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 36
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 17
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 37
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 18
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 38
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 19
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 39
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 20
DOA
0.1
9.2-112 - 40
DOA
0.1
Remarks/
Effectivity
Rev.
No.
0.1
9.2-112 - 42
0.1
9.2-112 - 43
0.1
9.2-112 - 44
0.1
9.2-112 2
Rem
Page
Rev.
No.
Rem
Page
Rev.
No.
Rem
APPROVED
Rev. 1
LOG OF REVISIONS
ORIGINAL
REVISION
0.1
REVISION
REVISION 1
Date: JAN 20, 2016
Approved by EASA
APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-112 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 7
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 7
2.
LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 9
2.1.
2.2.
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 9
2.3.
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 9
2.4.
2.5.
2.5.1.
Limitations for GLS approaches coupled with APP and GS mode . 9.2-112 11
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
3.
3.1.
Warning/Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 13
3.1.1.
3.1.2.
3.2.
3.2.1.
3.3.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
9.2-112 4
APPROVED
Rev. 1
Page
4.
4.1.
4.1.1.
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
LNAV and LNAV+V approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-112 39
5.
6.
7.
7.1.
7.2.
7.3.
7.4.
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 5
LIST OF FIGURES
Page
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
LIST OF TABLES
Table 5:
9.2-112 6
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
In this supplement the term GTN is used for the system Garmin GTN 650 and
GTN 750.
1.1.
1.2.
1.3.
ABBREVIATIONS
A
ACAS
ALT
ALT.A
APCH
APP
CDI
CRS
D
E
DR
EGNOS
ENR
FAF
GLS
GPIP
GPS
GS
G/S
Dead Reckoning
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System
Enroute
Final Approach Fix
GPS Landing System
Glidepath Interception Point
(point where the glidepath touches the ground)
Global Positioning System
Autopilot glideslope mode
Glideslope
HTWAS
i
IAF
IF
INTG
IP
ILS
F
G
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 7
LNAV
LNAV+V
LOC
LOS
LP
LPV
L/VNAV
LOI
LOW ALT
MAP
MLS
MSG
NAV
ND
NM
NMS
Navigation
Navigation display
Nautical Mile
Navigation Management System
OBS
pb
PF
Push-button
Pilot-Flying
RNAV
RNP
SBAS
SDF
sk
SUSP
TCAD
TERM
TERPS
UNSUSP
Unsuspended
VLOC
VNAV
VtF
W WAAS
WPT
V
9.2-112 8
Area Navigation
Required navigation performance
Satellite Based Augumentation System
Simplified directional facility
Soft Key
Suspended
Traffic Collision Alert Device
Terminal
Terminal Instrument Procedures
VOR and LOCalizer
Vertical Navigation
Vector to Final
Wide Area Augumentation System
Waypoint
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
2.
LIMITATIONS
CAUTION
2.1.
THE GTN SHALL BE CONFIGURED TO AUTOMATIC CROSSFILL, UNLESS OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS DICTATE OTHERWISE. SBAS
EGNOS, WAAS MUST BE ENABLED.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
This FMS is applicable to the software versions shown in Table 1.
Approved Software Version or later approved version for this TC
Software item
SW Version
As displayed on unit
Main SW Version
5.11
5.11
GPS SW Version
5.0
5.0
Table 5:
Required Equipment
The Main and GPS software versions are displayed on the start-up page immediately after
power-on.
2.2.
TEMPERATURE
Minimum cabin temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20_C
2.3.
APPLICABILITY
EC135 Area navigation system based on each GTN upon the VOR/ILS receiver is
approved for DP/SPIFR en-route, terminal and precision instrument approach navigation.
EC135 Area navigation system based on the selected GTN upon the GPS receiver is
approved for DP/SPIFR en-route and terminal navigation:
B-RNAV
P-RNAV
EC135 Area navigation system based on each GTN upon the GPS receiver is approved for
DP/SPIFR navigation:
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 9
EC135 Area navigation system based on the GTN has satisfied the requirements defined in:
P-RNAV operations: JAA Temporary Guidance Material, Leaflet No.10: Airworthiness and Operational Approval for Precision RNAV Operation in Designated European Airspace.
RNP APCH down to LNAV minima: EASA Guidance Material, AMC20-27: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria for RNP APPROACH (RNP APCH)
Operations Including APV BARO-VNAV Operations.
RNP APCH down to LPV minima: EASA Guidance Material, AMC20-28: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria for RNAV GNSS approach operation to
LPV minima using SBAS.
RNP APCH down to LP minima: EASA Guidance Material, AMC20-28: Airworthiness Approval and Operational Criteria for RNAV GNSS approach operation to
LPV minima using SBAS.
Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS and any other type of
approach not approved for GPS overlay
Moreover:
Navigation using Dead reckoning is only an estimate and should not be used as
the sole means of navigation. Other means of navigation are to be used.
The use of the GTN RNAV function as primary NAV source is permitted only when a
current and approved database is used.
9.2-112 10
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
2.4.
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
For GLS approaches, the GTN units must be configured to automatic crossfill.
The following equipment must be installed:
2.5.
FCDS cockpit
Dual side with 4 or 3-screen version or
Single side with 2-screen version.
If 3-screen version (FMS 9.260 Flight Control Display System (3screen version))
is installed, SMD68 must not be used for GLS approaches. During these approaches
NMS should be selected as NAV source on SMD68.
AFCS (SW version, refer to FMS 9.2-48 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)).
2.5.1.
DURING STEEP APPROACHES WITH TAIL WIND MAKE SURE TQ REMAINS AT LEAST 5% TO PREVENT ENTERING AUTOROTATION. WHEN
GS CANNOT BE MAINTAINED PERFORM MISSED APPROACH AND SELECT DIFFERENT APPORACH.
NOTE D Steep approaches with a glide path angle > 4.5_ may require higher pilot attentiveness than normal approaches, especially if the pilot is unfamiliar with
steep approaches.
D Course change at FAF between 40 and 45_ increases the pilot workload as a
short excursion outside the 45_ will prevent the aircraft from allowing an LPV
approach.
D Latest when reaching the DA/DH the pilot has to fly hands-on.
APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-112 11
2.6.
OPERATIONAL LIMITATION
If 3-screen version (FMS 9.260 Flight Control Display System (3screen version)) is
installed, SBAS/EGNOS (LPV) procedures are limited to SPIFR only.
2.7.
ADDITIONAL LIMITATION
No device may be used to cover fingers used to operate the GTN unless the Glove
Qualification Procedure located in the Pilots Guide/Cockpit Reference Guide has been
successfully completed. The Glove Qualification Procedure is specific to a pilot / glove /
GTN combination.
2.8.
OPERATIONAL INFORMATION
Wearing of glasses having polarized lenses could jeopardise the readability of the GTN
display.
9.2-112 12
APPROVED
Rev. 1
3.
In case of GTN failure or partial failure the flight can be continued by using other
appropriate navigation equipment. The failed system should be switched off.
(observe para 2.4.)
3.1.
WARNING/CAUTION
3.1.1.
Warning/caution indications
NMS
(RED ON FCDS NAVIGATION DISPLAY - NMS PAGE)
Conditions/Indications
If problem persists:
2. NAV pb on ICP panel
CAUTION INDICATION
MSG
(ON GTN UNIT (GREY BLINKING SK), ON NMS PAGE)
Conditions/Indications
In case of GPS Navigation Lost or Loss Of Integrity course guidance will be removed
on the FCDS CDI:
Use alternate navigation source
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 13
In case of message Abort Approach raised during a GPS approach in which GPS accuracy requirements cannot be met by the GPS receiver, GTN exits LNAV navigation mode
and course guidance will be removed on the FCDS CDI.
1. MSG sk
NOTE
Immediately upon viewing the message, the unit will revert to terminal navigation
mode alarm limits. If the position integrity is within these limits lateral guidance
will be restored and the GPS may be used to execute the missed approach,
otherwise alternate means of navigation must be utilized.
CAUTION INDICATION
LOI
AND
INTG
(AMBER ON ANNUNCIATOR PANEL)
Conditions/Indications
Loss of integrity
9.2-112 14
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
CAUTION INDICATION
DR
(AMBER ON GTN UNIT)
Conditions/Indications
Dead Reckoning
Check if DR is indicated
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 15
3.1.2.
LPV
OR
L/VNAV
OR
LP
Conditions/Indications
SBAS integrity is currently on its limit. The approach is safe to continue but a downgrade to LNAV may occur.
Procedure
1. Continue approach
Conditions/Indications
a discrepancy is detected between the GTN1 and GTN2, either because one unit is
malfunctioning or because both units are computing different values.
Procedure
1. Impacted parameter
Monitor
X-check with another source
(barometric height, radar height,
VOR, NDB)
If not possible:
2. Missed approach
9.2-112 16
Perform
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
FAILURE INDICATIONS
PFD
ND
ILS 1
108.1
98
97
96
9500
94
93
92
ATT
160
140
ALIGNMENT
120
CHECK SMD
100
220
33
1010
3
hPa
33
30
1600
ALIGN
W
CHECK SMD
24
12
21
1500
1400
15
Conditions/Indications
A discrepancy is detected between the GTN1 and GTN2, either because one unit is
malfunctioning or because both units are computing different values.
Procedure
1. Impacted parameter
Monitor
X-check with another source
(barometric height, radar height,
VOR, NDB)
If not possible:
2. Missed approach
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
Perform
9.2-112 17
LNAV
CAUTION
NOTE
When approach is continued using the alternate NMS, AFCS upper modes will
be displayed in amber as no redundancy is available anymore.
continued
9.2-112 18
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
Indications when entering the approach and downgrade occurs in TERMINAL Phase of
Flight:
For LP only:
The lateral deviation will be flagged and AFCS NAV mode will decouple.
Once the MSG is acknowledged, the GTN will continue to provide valid lateral
deviation for LNAV minima and AFCS can be re-engaged.
Indications while the approach is active and downgrade occurs more than 60 seconds to
the FAF:
For LP:
The lateral deviation will be flagged and AFCS NAV or APP mode will decouple.
Once the MSG is acknowledged, the GTN will continue to provide valid lateral
deviation for LNAV minima and AFCS can be re-engaged.
Procedure
1. Other GTN unit
Check on
4. AFCS
Re-engage
5. Continue approach using normal procedure and select GLS page of the GTN
which shows LPV, LNAV/V or LP
6. From FAF onward, X-check indicated Baro altitude along the glidepath with
published altitudes
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 19
LNAV approach
Perform
Use appropriate autopilot mode
(e.g. ALT.A) to descend to LNAV
minima
Do not descend below LNAV
minima
LP is aborted
Indications:
For LP:
The lateral deviation will be flagged and AFCS APP mode will decouple.
Once the MSG is acknowledged, the GTN will show TERMINAL in green and
continue to provide lateral deviation and AFCS NAV mode can be engaged.
Procedure
1. Execute a missed approach and continue to the MAP
9.2-112 20
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
TERM
AND
MSG
Indications:
The lateral deviation will be flagged and AFCS NAV mode will decouple.
Immediately upon viewing the message, the unit will revert to terminal navigation
mode alarm limits. If the position integrity is within these limits; lateral guidance will
be restored and the GPS may be used to execute the missed approach, otherwise alt ernate means of navigation must be utilized.
Check on
4. AFCS
Re-engage
Execute a missed approach using other means of navigation (e.g. VOR or ADF)
9.2-112 21
LP is aborted
Indications:
For LP:
The lateral deviation will be flagged and AFCS APP mode will decouple.
Once the MSG is acknowledged, the GTN will show TERMINAL in green and
continue to provide lateral deviation and AFCS N AV mode can be engaged.
Procedure
1. Execute a missed approach and continue to the MAP
9.2-112 22
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
NOTE
Although internal NMS data is used for these approaches, during a loss of GTN
the FCDS receives the same fault code as during a ILS/VOR approach and
could flag a red ILSi VORi or GLSi indication on the GLS page.
Conditions/Indications
2. NMS1/NMS2 pb
Set accordingly
Check on
4. AFCS
Re-engage
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 23
3.1.3.
NMS
9.2-78-10
Conditions/Indications
If problem persists:
2. NAV pb on ICP panel
9.2-112 24
Press
to
select
navigation source
VOR/ILS
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
3.2.
ACAS FAILURE
3.2.1.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
ADC 1
or/and
PFD
ADC 2
or
AHRS2
PFD
PFD
and as a result:
FAILED
indication on the Garmin display
OFF
2. Continue flight
NOTE
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 25
3.3.
3.4.
Roll steering will not be provided to the autopilot for heading legs. The autopilot must
not be placed in NAV mode. HDG mode for heading legs must be used.
All overlaying traffic data from ACAS on the main map display. The flight crew must
use the dedicated traffic page on the GTN system to display ACAS traffic data
3.5.
Automatic leg sequencing of legs requiring an altitude source. The flight crew must
manually sequence altitude legs, as prompted by the system.
3.6.
Whenever the procedure requests to select the other ILS source, the NMS1/NMS2
pb shall be set accordingly
9.2-112 26
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
For detailed information refer to the GARMIN GTN 650 Pilots Guide (P/N
1900100403) and/or GARMIN GTN 750 Pilots Guide (P/N 1900100703).
Before usage of the screens, it should be checked the display screens are clean.
Definitions:
Straight-in approach:
course change at the FAF is equal or less than 2_.
Turn on FAF approach:
course change at the FAF is more than 2_.
4.1.
IFR PROCEDURES
CAUTION
The crew must be proficient with the system operation and the applicable IFR
procedures. To enhance operational proficiency it is recommended to thoroughly practice
relevant procedures prior to actual use.
4.1.1.
Airspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 kt
9.2-112 27
D The airspeed protection feature in the GS mode may cause deviation from the
intended flight path when activated. Its activation is indicated by the the
appropriate color and symbology changes (refer to FMS 9.2-48 Automatic
Flight Control System (AFCS).
D SBAS availability is provided by NOTAM. Integrity prediction for LPV approaches is provided by SBAS itself.
D Do not change NAV SOURCE prior to waypoint sequencing.
D No groundspeed is displayed on the GLS page. Use the display of the GTN if
groundspeed reference is needed.
D In case of a single side cockpit:
select the GLS 1 page on the (virtual) LH side by selecting ICP 1 on the
RCU and using the NAV SOURCE pb on ICP 1
set the final approach course for GLS 1 by selecting ICP 1 on the RCU and
using the CRS knob on ICP 1
After having finished the settings revert to N on the RCU
In the procedures outlined below, both NMS should be prepared for the respective approaches such that in case of failure the alternate NMS can be used.
9.2-112 28
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
EFFECTIVITY
4.1.1.1. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) straight in or turn on FAF using transition
waypoints
Both GTN
Select GPS
NMS1/NMS2 pb
Select PF NMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via transition waypoint
Engage
track
heading to maintain
ND pb on both ICPs
Select HSI
NAV pb on APMS
90 kt
Both GTN
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
Recommended airspeed
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 29
NMS NAV mode change over to GLS mode through armed APP/GS may trigger
a DECOUPLE caution.
Push
ND pb on ICP PF
Select HSI
ND
9.2-112 30
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
4.1.1.2. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) straight-in using vectors to final
Both GTN
on
APMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via vectors to final
Both GTN
ND pb on both ICPs
Select HSI
ND PF
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 31
4.1.1.3. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) turn on FAF using vectors to final
Both GTN
on
APMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via vectors to final
Both GTN
ND pb on both ICPs
Select HSI
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
At 1 NM to FAF:
NOTE
NMS NAV mode change over to GLS mode through armed APP/GS may trigger
a DECOUPLE caution.
Push
ND pb on ICP PF
Select HSI
ND
9.2-112 32
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 33
EFFECTIVITY
4.1.1.4. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) straight in or turn on FAF using transition
waypoints
Both GTN
Select GPS
NMS1/NMS2 pb
Select PF NMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via transition waypoint
Engage
track
heading to maintain
Select GLS 2
ND pb on ICP 2
Select HSI
Select ICP 1
Select ICP N
NAV pb on APMS
90 kt
Both GTN
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
Recommended airspeed
9.2-112 34
NMS NAV mode change over to GLS mode through armed APP/GS may trigger
a DECOUPLE caution.
Push
Select GLS 2
ND pb on ICP 2
Select HSI
ND
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 35
4.1.1.5. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) straight-in using vectors to final
Both GTN
on
APMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via vectors to final
Both GTN
Select GLS 2
ND pb on ICP 2
Select HSI
Select ICP 1
Select ICP N
ND PF
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
9.2-112 36
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
4.1.1.6. RNP APCH (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP) turn on FAF using vectors to final
Both GTN
on
APMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via vectors to final
Both GTN
Select GLS 2
ND pb on ICP 2
Select HSI
Select ICP 1
Select ICP N
Push
Check APP(A)
arming illuminate
and
GS(A)
Push
Check APP(A) arming illuminate
IAS pb on APMS
At 1 NM to FAF:
NOTE
NMS NAV mode change over to GLS mode through armed APP/GS may trigger
a DECOUPLE caution.
Push
Select GLS 2
ND pb on ICP 2
Select HSI
ND
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 37
9.2-112 38
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
4.1.2.
NMS selector pb
Select PF NMS
Press
Select RNAV approach (LNAV
or LNAV+V)
Select and activate transition
waypoint or vectorstofinal
on
APMS
Load
and
activate RNAV
approach via vectors to final
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 39
4.1.3.
5.
GA pb on collective
Upon passing MAP
Select
to
approach
NAV pb on APMS
activate
missed
PERFORMANCE DATA
No change in the basic Flight Manual data.
9.2-112 40
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
6.
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
For more detailed information either check FLM supplement 9.2-111 and/or the GARMIN
GTN 650 Pilots Guide (P/N 1900100403) and/or GARMIN GTN 750 Pilots Guide (P/N
1900100703).
7.1.
7.2.
APR
SUSP/OBS
OBS mode is annunciated when GTN unit is in OBS mode or SUSP with
automatic leg sequencing being suspended
VLOC/GPS
Indications on GTN
TERM
WPT
LNAV
LNAV/VNAV
SBAS integrity is currently on its limit. The approach is safe to continue but a
downgrade to LNAV may occur.
LP
SBAS integrity is currently on its limit. The approach is safe to continue but a
downgrade to LNAV may occur.
LPV
SBAS integrity is currently on its limit. The approach is safe to continue but a
downgrade to LNAV may occur.
LNAV
LNAV/VNAV
LP
LPV
DPRT
ENR
Enroute mode, the GTN uses 2.0 NM as horizontal alert limit and
a CDI scale of 2.0 NM
OCN
LOW ALT
DR
the LOW ALT annunciation indicates the aircrafts estimated height is lower
than the Final Approach Waypoint height by approximately 50 meters. This
annunciation will not be active when TAWS is operational.
the GTN to provides limited navigation using the last known position and
speed after a loss of GPS navigation while on an active flight plan.
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
9.2-112 41
Indications on GTN
LOI
MSG
Fig. 2
9.2-112 42
VLOC
INTG
GPS
APR
OBS
SUSP
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 0.1
7.3.
NMS1
NMS2
NMS 1 interfaced to FCDS
Fig. 3
MANUFACTURERS DATA
APPROVED
Rev. 0.1
or
NMS1
NMS2
NMS 2 interfaced to FCDS
9.2-112 43
7.4.
VLOC/GPS PUSHBUTTON
The VLOC/GPS pushbutton is used to switch between VOR/ILS and GLS (ILS look alike)
guidance of both GTN units to the FCDS and autopilot.
The VLOC/GPS pushbutton can be either set to VLOC for performing conventional VOR/
ILS navigation or to GPS for performing GLS approach types i.e. LPV, LNAV/VNAV and
LP.The VLOC/GPS pushbutton is dimmable via the rheostat in the overhead panel.
The pushbutton is power supplied via the NMS 1 cb and NMS 2 cb. In case of loss of 28
VDC power distribution to the pushbutton the VOR/ILS information of both GTN will be
interfaced to the display and autopilot system.
VLOC
GPS
Fig. 4
9.2-112 44
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 0.1
EFFECTIVITY
FMS
9.2-117
SUPPLEMENT FOR
EXTERNAL HOIST SYSTEM LH/RH SIDE (227 KG / 500 LBS)
This supplement shall be attached to the EC 135 Flight Manual (Section 9.2) when the
External Hoist System is installed.
System/Equipment Designation
NOTE
Effectivity
All
All
All
For approving authorities and respective dates of approval refer to the log of supplements.
Approved by EASA
9.2-117 1
N, R, or D indicate pages which are New, Revised or Deleted respectively. Remove and dispose of superseded pages, insert the latest revision pages and complete the Record of Supplement-Revisions as necessary.
LEP EASA approved (part 1):
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-117 -1
9.2-117 -15
9.2-117 -29
9.2-117 -2
1.1
9.2-117 -16
9.2-117 -30
9.2-117 -3
1.1
9.2-117 -17
9.2-117 -31
9.2-117 -4
9.2-117 -18
9.2-117 -32
9.2-117 -5
9.2-117 -19
9.2-117 -33
9.2-117 -6
9.2-117 -20
9.2-117 -34
9.2-117 -7
9.2-117 -21
9.2-117 -35
9.2-117 -8
9.2-117 -22
9.2-117 -36
9.2-117 -9
9.2-117 -23
9.2-117 -37
9.2-117 -10
9.2-117 -24
9.2-117 -38
9.2-117 -11
9.2-117 -25
9.2-117 -39
9.2-117 -12
9.2-117 -26
9.2-117 -40
9.2-117 -13
9.2-117 -27
9.2-117 -41
9.2-117 -14
9.2-117 -28
9.2-117 -42
Rem
Rev.No.
R 9.2-117 -43
1.1
9.2-117 -47
R 9.2-117 -44
1.1
9.2-117 -48
9.2-117 -45
9.2-117 -49
9.2-117 -46
9.2-117 -50
9.2-117 2
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
Rem
Page
Rev.No.
9.2-117 -51
/(52blank)
Rem
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1.1
LOG OF REVISION
FIRST ISSUE
ORIGINAL
REVISION
1
NOV 20, 2015
(EASA Approval No.: 10055554)
REVISION
1.1
REVISION 1.1
Revision No. 1.1 to FMS reference revision 1 is approved under authority of DOA No.
EASA.21J.034.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1.1
9.2-117 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 8
1.1.
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 8
1.2.
2.
LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 9
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 10
2.7.
2.7.1.
2.7.2.
2.8.
2.8.1.
2.8.2.
2.9.
2.9.1.
2.9.2.
2.10.
2.11.
2.13.
2.14.
9.2-117 4
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
Page
3.
3.1.
3.2.
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.3.
3.3.1.
3.3.2.
3.4.
3.5.
3.6.
3.7.
4.
4.1.
4.2.
4.2.1.
4.2.2.
5.
5.1.
5.2.
5.3.
5.4.
5.4.1.
6.
6.1.
6.2.
6.2.1.
6.2.2.
Max. allowable hoist load for a given in-flight C.G. and gross mass 9.2-117 43
6.3.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 5
Page
7.
7.1.
7.2.
7.2.1.
7.2.2.
7.3.
7.3.1.
7.3.2.
7.4.
7.4.1.
7.4.2.
7.4.3.
7.5.
7.6.
7.7.
9.2-117 6
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
LIST OF FIGURES
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Clear area and cargo close to the ground HEC hoist operations
requiring OEI performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 38
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
Standard Hook (NHEC and HEC operations not requiring OEI performance)
typical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 48
Fig. 9
Slide Lock Hook (NHEC and HEC operations not requiring OEI performance)
typical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2-117 48
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 7
1.
GENERAL
The information contained herein supplements the information of the basic Flight Manual;
for limitations, procedures, and performance data not contained in this supplement, refer
to the basic Flight Manual.
This supplement applies for all hoist installations according CS27 Amdt. 2. For hoist
installations FAR 27 Amdt. 2 see FMS 9.220.
1.1.
DEFINITIONS
NHEC:
Non-Human External Cargo. Any hoist operation that does not at any time involve a
person(s) being carried on the hoist.
HEC:
Human External Cargo. Any hoist operation where a person(s) is carried on the hoist.
HEC hoist operations requiring the use of Cat A rotorcraft and where the helicopter
has sufficient OEI hover capability to ensure safety of the rotorcraft, the persons on
the hoist and third parties or property in case of critical engine failure during the hoist
operation.
HEC hoist operations where the helicopter does not require OEI hover capability in
case of critical engine failure.
Jettisonable:
The hoist cable can be intentionally cut using the cable cut function or the cable
scissors.
PCDS:
9.2-117 8
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
1.2.
OPERATIONAL RULES
The categorization of rotorcraft-load combinations is given for guidance/information
only, since it is an operational requirement defined in FAR Part 133 which may not be
applicable in other countries and is subject to change and interpretation by the national
operational authorities. Within this context, the hoist system described in this flight
manual supplement is generally understood to be a:
2.
Class B rotorcraft-load combination when HEC is carried, but the requirements for
hoist operations requiring OEI performance are not applicable and/or no
communication between the rotorcraft crew and the external occupants is necessary.
Class D rotorcraft-load combination when HEC is carried and the requirements for
hoist operations requiring OEI performance are applicable and communication
between the rotorcraft crew and the external occupants is necessary.
LIMITATIONS
NOTE
2.1.
Alternate static port shall not be used if the sliding doors are opened.
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
The installed Boarding step/ Multifunction step must be approved for installation in
conjunction with the external hoist system.
If the snow skids or skids for the emergency floats are installed in conjunction with the
external hoist system, the respective cable deflector kit and the approved boarding step
must be installed.
Flight operations with opened doors are permissible only when an approved Sliding Door
Locking Device is installed and sliding door curtains, if installed, have been removed.
2.2.
HIGH NR MODE
During hoist operations the HIGH NR mode must be selected. The limitations /
procedures for HIGH NR mode in the basic Flight Manual remains unchanged.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 9
2.3.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
Operation of the helicopter is approved for the lifting of loads (NHEC or HEC) free of land
or water under VFR (day/night incl. NVIS). The load jettisoning system (i.e. electric cable
cut function and cable scissors) must be installed and operational.
NVIS operations are approved in accordance with FMS 9.2-86.
Operations with a load attached to the hoist shall be conducted in accordance with the
appropriate operating rules for external loads. Operations with Human External Cargo
(HEC) require approval of the responsible authority.
Category A procedures with opened doors and/or extended hoist are prohibited.
Whenever flight with open cabin doors is conducted, all passengers in the cabin shall be
seated with seat belts fastened or shall be properly secured to an approved cabin
attachment point. Loose objects must be safely secured and prevented from moving.
Landings with hoist load attached to the hook are generally prohibited. If particular
operational conditions require landing with the load attached to the hook, care shall be
taken to avoid shock loading the hoist. If a shock load is encountered or overload clutch
slippage has occurred, maintenance is required.
2.4.
FLIGHT CREW
NOTE
Before executing hoist operations the crew must be properly trained for this
specific kind of operation.
The minimum flight crew consists of one pilot and one hoist operator.
During hoist operations the hoist operator must be secured to the attachment point in the
helicopter with an approved Personnel Carrying Device System (PCDS).
2.5.
2.6.
COMMUNICATION
For hoist operations intercommunication shall be maintained between the pilot(s) and the
hoist operator. The hoist operator shall use the WINCH intercom connector.
For HEC operations, verbal or non-verbal (i.e. hand signals) communication between the
external occupants (HEC) and pilot(s)/hoist operator must be maintained. If operational
rules require verbal communication, one of the following means of communication shall
be used:
An approved VHF or FM radio selectable on the crew intercom system and a portable
radio carried by the external occupant (connected to a helmet/headset worn by the
external occupant).
NOTE
9.2-117 10
2.7.
2.7.1.
2.7.2.
2.8.
To comply with EASA hoist requirements, the temporary hoist load limitations of
Para. 2.14.2. are to be observed.
2.8.1.
Longitudinal C.G.
For hoist operations the basic longitudinal C.G. envelope of FLM Section 2 applies to the
helicopter with a load on the hoist. Para 6.2. of this supplement gives an aid in
determining the allowable C.G. envelope of the helicopter with the hoist fitted, but no
load attached.
2.8.2.
Lateral C.G.
Lateral C.G. of the helicopter must be within the basic helicopter limits before starting the
hoist operation.
For hoist operations the basic lateral C.G. envelope of FLM Section 2 applies to the
helicopter with the hoist fitted, but no load attached. It is permitted to exceeded the
basic lateral CG envelope by picking up a hoist load up to the maximum allowable mass
as given in Para. 2.7.2. of this supplement.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 11
2.9.
ALTITUDE LIMITATION
2.9.1.
2.9.2.
Maximum altitude for flight with load attached to the hook is limited to 1000 ft above the
max. altitude for HOGE Performance according to section 5 of the Basic Flight Manual in
part Hover ceiling out of ground effect (AEO,TOP, Bleed Air off).
2.10.
TEMPERATURE LIMITATION
Minimum OAT for hoist operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35_C
Maximum OAT for hoist operation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +50_C
2.11.
AIRSPEED LIMITATION
With boom retracted and hook fully raised (no load), the limitations of the basic helicopter
remain unchanged.
MANEUVERING LIMITATIONS
Maximum permissible bank angle is:
9.2-117 12
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
2.13.
EFFECTIVITY
If the hoist is RH-side installed the wind limitations of the Basic Flight Manual remain
valid.
EFFECTIVITY
LH side - Hoist operations have been demonstrated under the following conditions:
75_
up to 20 kt
up to 30 kt
15_
up to 60 kt
180_
15_
up to 30 kt
Fig. 1
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 13
EFFECTIVITY
45_
135_
up to 10 kt
up to 20 kt
up to 30 kt
15_
up to 60 kt
(45 kt *)
180_
15_
up to 30 kt
Fig. 2
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-117 14
ALL
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 0
2.14.
HOIST LIMITATION
According to the current EASA hoist AD the following temporary warnings and
cautions concerning the overload clutch have to be respected.
To comply with EASA requirements, the following temporary hoist limitations are
to be observed.
9.2-117 15
All
HEC
For all HEC operations the DLock hook (see para 7.4.3.) must be fitted and approved in
accordance with the relevant airworthiness requirements.
EFFECTIVITY
NHEC
For NHEC operations the standard hook (see para 7.4.1.) or the slide lock hook (see
para 7.4.2.) or the D-Lock hook (see para 7.4.3.) can be fitted and approved in
accordance with the relevant airworthiness requirements.
EFFECTIVITY
ALL
9.2-117 16
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
2.15.
EFFECTIVITY
Placard:
AUSSENWINDE
BETRIEBSGRENZEN: AUF AB
WINDENLAST: kg
230 230
SEILLNGE:
50 m
Placard:
AUSSENWINDE
BETRIEBSGRENZEN: AUF AB
WINDENLAST: kg
204 204
SEILLNGE:
50 m
Placard:
AUSSENWINDE
BETRIEBSGRENZEN: AUF AB
WINDENLAST: kg
230 230
SEILLNGE:
90 m
Placard:
AUSSENWINDE
BETRIEBSGRENZEN: AUF AB
WINDENLAST: kg
204 204
SEILLNGE:
90 m
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 17
Placard:
DIESEN GRIFF NICHT ZUR
PERSONENSICHERUNG VERWENDEN
DO NOT USE THIS HANDLE FOR
SECURING PERSONS
Location: Inside cabin, near handles
Placard:
WINDENBETRIEB MIT PERSONENLAST
IST IN BEREINSTIMMUNG MIT DEN NATIONALEN VORSCHRIFTEN DURCHZUFHREN
BEI WINDENMISSIONEN DRFEN NUR
DIE FR DEN WINDENBETRIEB ERFORDERLICHEN PERSONEN AN BORD SEIN
Placard:
MAX. LAST: 230 KG
MAX. LOAD: 500 LBS
Location: Inside cabin, near safety harness fitting (optional)
9.2-117 18
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
EFFECTIVITY
Placard:
OPERATION MIT AUSGEFAHRENEM KABEL UND LAST AUF DEM HAKEN:
MAX. ZULAESSIGER ROLLWINKEL 20_
WARNUNG: UEBERSCHREITUNG VON 15_ DES SEITLICHEN PENDELWINKELS/HS
VERTIKALKOMPONENTE KANN ZUM RUTSCHEN DER UEBERLASTKUPPLUNG
FUEHREN
ACHTUNG: ES IST UNWAHRSCHEINLICH, DASS DIE UEBERLASTKUPPLUNG IM FALL
EINER OVERLOAD FUNKTIONIERT
OPERATION WITH EXTENDED CABLE AND LOAD ON THE HOOK:
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE BANK ANGLE IN TURN IS 20_
WARNING: EXCEEDING 15_ OF LATERAL PENDULUM ANGLE/HELICOPTER
VERTICAL AXIS CAN LEAD TO CLUTCH SLIPPAGE
CAUTION: OVERLOAD CLUTCH IS UNLIKELY TO FUNCTION IN CASE OF OVERLOAD
Placard:
A MAXIMUM OF TWO PERSONS WITH EQUIPMENT AT
A TIME SHALL BE HOISTED, EXCEPT WHEN IT CAN
BE EXPLICITLY DETERMINED THAT MORE PERSONS
WITH EQUIPMENT DO NOT EXCEED
THE MAXIMUM HOIST LOAD (E.G. WHEN SMALL PERSONS
OR CHILDREN ARE BEING HOISTED).
OAT ABOVE 20_C
MAXIMUM HOIST LOAD 450 LB (204 KG)
OAT AT OR BELOW 20_C
MAXIMUM HOIST LOAD 400 LB (181 KG)
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 19
Placard:
DER WINDENBETREIBER MUSS BERUECKSICHTIGEN,
DASS DIE FUNKTION DER UEBERLAST KUPPLUNG
NICHT GARANTIERT WERDEN KANN UND
ENTSPRECHEND GEFAEHRLICHE SITUATIONEN
FUER DEN HUBSCHRAUBER DURCH VERHAKTES
WINDENSEIL VERMEIDEN.
HOIST OPERATORS SHALL PREVENT HAZARDS
TO THE AIRCRAFT RESULTING FROM A CABLE
SNAG AS CORRECT FUNCTIONING OF THE
OVERLOAD CLUTCH IS NOT GUARANTEED.
Location: LH or RH sliding door upper frame
EFFECTIVITY
9.2-117 20
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
3.
3.1.
CABLE CUTTING
Conditions/Indications
In the event of a severe inflight emergency, it might be necessary to cut the cable in
order to avoid hazard for the flight crew or helicopter.
NOTE
If the cable needs to be cut in a non time-critical situation (e.g. cable entangled
on ground), the cable cutter shears (step 3.) can be used as an alternative.
Procedure
Cutting may be performed by either pilot or hoist operator.
Pilot collective grip
1. CUT CABLE pb guard
Raise
2. CUT CABLE pb
Press
Raise
2. CUT CABLE pb
Press
If, for any reason the pyrotechnic cable cutting device fails to operate:
3. Cable Cutter Shears
3.2.
ENGINE FAILURE
NOTE D Pyrotechnic cable cutter remains operational regardless of generator status.
D Safe flyout trajectory free of obstacles should be secured before starting hoist
operation
D An appopriate mean to determine T/O and acceleration distances in
combination with mass reduction can be found in FMS 9.1.1 Category A:
Climbout Flight Path, height gain over horizontal distance (segment I+II).
D The procedures below require extensive (prebriefed) crew coordination
whereby pilot and hoist operator perform certain actions simultaneously and
not in order as written down. For example: Hoist is being retracted and
stowed, simultaneously pilot reduces collective and increases airspeed.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 21
EFFECTIVITY
3.2.1.
Perform
Hoist
Retract
Embark cargo
Fully retract and stow
9.2-117 22
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
EFFECTIVITY
3.2.2.
The aircraft gross mass is at or below the gross mass according Fig. 3.
Procedure
1. Hover position
Maintain
2. Hoist load
Lower
Perform
Hoist
4. Hoist
Stow
5. Collective lever
7. Clear of obstacles
Perform
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 23
3.2.3.
The cargo (HEC) attached to the hoist is safely off the ground/deck but still within the
obstacle environment.
The aircraft gross mass is at or below the gross mass according Fig. 4 reduced by:
20 kg for HEC load up to 150 ft (45 m) below surrounding obstacle height
35 kg for HEC load up to 300 ft (90 m) below surrounding obstacle height
60 kg for HEC load up to 450 ft (135 m) below surrounding obstacle height
Procedure
1. Hover position
Maintain
2. Hoist
3. Collective lever
7. Hoist
Embark cargo
Fully retract and stow
8. Doors
Close
Establish VY (65
appropriate altitude
Perform
9.2-117 24
KIAS)
to
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
3.2.4.
The cargo (HEC) attached to the hoist is safely off the ground/deck and a safe
fly-away possible.
The aircraft gross mass is at or below the gross mass according Fig. 3.
Procedure
1. Hover position
Maintain
2. Hoist
6. Collective lever
7. Hoist
Embark cargo
Fully retract and stow
8. Doors
Close
9. Climb / descent
Perform
EFFECTIVITY
All
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 25
3.3.
GENERATOR FAILURE
NOTE
3.3.1.
Perform
2. Hoist cycle
Complete
Before starting further hoist operation, reduce electrical load of remaining generator to
50A or below (watch ammeter). Hoist load should not exceed 150 kg.
3.3.2.
Procedure
1. Hoist operation
Stop
Perform
Before landing:
3. Load
4. Cable
9.2-117 26
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
3.4.
Push
Pull
* This pb can also be labelled HOIST / HOIST STBY. In this FMS only the push button label
WINCH / WINCH STBY is used.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 27
3.5.
Cable is severely damaged (wire strands broken) or shows pronounced kinks, bird
cages, necking or any other kind of damage, or
There is evidence that the hoist miswrapped or that the cable is jammed within the
hoist.
Procedure
WARNING
If damage is suspected:
1. Hoist operation
Stop
2. Cable or hoist
Push
Before landing:
3. Load
4. Cable
9.2-117 28
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
3.6.
NOTE
Actions of pilot and hoist operator should be done simultaneously and coordinated.
Pilot/copilot
1. Airspeed
Establish approx. 30 kt
Hoist operator
2. Control pendant
3. Load
If oscillations persist:
4. Cable
3.7.
CAUTION INDICATIONS
CA CUT ARM
(on CPDS)
Conditions/Indications
Hoist system is activated.
Procedure
None (normal hoist operation)
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 29
CAUTION INDICATIONS
CAUTION
(on control pendant)
Conditions/Indications
Cable length within 3 m (10 ft) before reaching fully reeled in or reeled out position. Hoist
motor speed is reduced automatically.
Procedure
None (normal hoist motor operation)
CAUTION INDICATIONS
OVERHEAT
(on control pendant)
Conditions/Indications
OVERHEAT caution light on control pendant illuminates steadily when temperature limits
of the hoist motor or gearbox lub oil are exceeded.
Procedure
1. Hoist cycle
Complete
2. Hoist operation
NOTE D During an overheat condition the drive motor speed is limited automatically.
D OVERHEAT light flashes for two seconds to check operation of the light when
hoist is initially powered-up.
9.2-117 30
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1.
PREFLIGHT CHECK
NOTE D Perform hoist system checks before any flight when hoist operation is
intended. Those checks marked with an asterisk (L) are minimum required
before each flight, when the hoist system is attached to the helicopter but no
hoist operation is intended.
D For supplementary information refer to Goodrich component maintenance
manual (P/N 443011)
L Hoist assembly
L Quick-release pins
Condition, secured
L Electrical connectors
Installed as required
Condition
Available
Oil level
Check
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 31
Exposed cable
Condition
Push
L Hook assembly
Control pendant BOOM toggle switch
L Boom
9.2-117 32
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
4.2.
HOIST OPERATION
4.2.1.
General Remarks
WARNING D WHEN USING A HOIST HOOK WITHOUT A LOCKABLE KEEPER, THE
ATTACHMENT OF THE LOAD CAN ROLL OUT OF THE HOOK UNDER
PARTICULAR DYNAMIC CONDITIONS.
D WHEN RAISING LOAD, OSCILLATIONS (ESPECIALLY AT SKID
HEIGHT) MUST BE REDUCED BY HOIST OPERATOR GRASPING AND
MOVING CABLE.
D THE LOAD SHOULD NOT BE REELED-IN WHEN OSCILLATIONS
EXCEED 510 CABLE ANGLE WITH RESPECT TO VERTICAL AXIS
OF THE HELICOPTER OR IF THE CABLE CONTACTS THE SKIDS.
REELING-IN AN OSCILLATING LOAD INCREASES THE AMPLITUDE
OF THE OSCILLATION AND COULD LEAD TO HAZARDOUS
CONDITION.
D DURING FLIGHT, A STATIC ELECTRICITY CHARGE DEVELOPS IN
THE HELICOPTER. TO AVOID INJURY TO GROUND PERSONNEL,
THE HOOK SHALL BE DISCHARGED BY USE OF AN ANTISTATIC
LINE OR ALLOWING THE HOOK TO TOUCH THE WATER OR
GROUND BEFORE IT IS TOUCHED BY GROUND PERSONNEL.
D REDUCE PEDAL AND CYCLIC STICK MOVEMENTS TO A MINIMUM
TO AVOID OSCILLATIONS. CONTINUOUS USE OF THE CYCLIC
FORCE TRIM RELEASE MIGHT AGGRAVATE THE SITUATION.
CAUTION D CHAFING THE CABLE AGAINST THE LANDING GEAR
EQUIPMENT COULD DAMAGE THE CABLE, WHICH MIGHT:
OR
9.2-117 33
To prevent roll out of the load, it is recommended to use a device (ring, D-ring,
snap safety hook) with a maximum inner diameter not larger than 40 mm or to
apply an adequate operational procedure in compliance with national
regulations.
The average cable speed with a hoist load of 500 lbs is 150 ft/min and 200 ft/min
with 300 lbs.
Within ranges before up-limit stop (upward motion only) and down limit stop
(downward motion only) the hoist is automatically slowed down.
For safety reasons, passengers and crew should be seated with their seat belts
fastened whenever possible. The hoist operator should be seated with seat belts
fastened when the hoist is not operated.
Connect NHEC load to hook using rigid, non-stretchable devices whenever possible.
When picking up several loads, place or seat each hoisted load in the cabin such
that the aircraft C.G. is kept within limits.
After exposure of hook/bumper assy to salt water, clean and pretension as outlined
in Maintenance Manual.
The hoist cycle and hoist operating time must be recorded in the helicopter Logbook.
The term cycle is defined as an extension and subsequent retraction of the cable
during flight, or on the ground, the extension and subsequent retraction of the cable
equal or beyond 16 feet (5.0 meter) whatever the load used.
The operating time is automatically counted when the hoist is operated by the
internal hour meter of the hoist.
9.2-117 34
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
4.2.2.
HO
P
P or HO
P
Hoist operator
Pilot or copilot, respectively
Pilot or copilot or Hoist operator, respectively
HO Cabin occupants
No loose items
CC-ARM ON
Comes on
Airspeed
Reduce to 60 kt or below
HO BOOM switch
OUT; extend
necessary
HO Load
P or HO
P
boom
outward
as
When wide loads are lifted, extend boom as required before load reaches skid
height to provide load-to-skid clearance.
HO Load
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 35
NOTE
It may be necessary to reel out a length of cable to bring load into cabin. After
securing load and releasing hook, fully reel in cable while guiding empty hook.
Close
OFF
NOTE D The hoist should be switched off, whenever it is not being tended by the hoist
operator.
D After the last flight of the day, a visual inspection of the hoist cable (maximum
used length + 3 m) shall be performed. When reeling in the cable after the
inspection, pretension shall be used. Refer to the Component Maintenance
Manual for details.
5.
PERFORMANCE DATA
5.1.
5.2.
Subtract 40 ft/min
Subtract 30 ft/min
Subtract 25 ft/min
HOIST OPERATION
The aerodynamic impact produced by extended boom/cable and attached load, is
negligible when the helicopter is operating within limitations defined in para. 2 of this
supplement.
9.2-117 36
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
5.3.
5.4.
5.4.1.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 37
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
CLEAR AREA
ZERO WIND OR HEADWIND
BLEED AIR: OFF
1900
2000
2100
GROSS MASS kg
2200
2300
2400
MIN. OAT
2600
MAX. OAT
2500
EC135_FLH_0531_R
2700
2800
40
Fig. 3
9.2-117 38
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
Clear area and cargo close to the ground HEC hoist operations requiring OEI
performance
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
5.4.2.
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 39
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
OEI
CONFINED AREA
ZERO WIND OR HEADWIND
BLEED AIR: OFF
1900
2000
2100
GROSS MASS kg
2200
2300
2400
MIN. OAT
2600
MAX. OAT
2500
EC135_FLH_0532_R
2700
2800
40
Fig. 4
9.2-117 40
30
20
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
5.5.
OEI TRAINING
Training of the following single engine emergency procedures may be conducted using
the procedures detailed in FLM supplement 9.14:
Cat A single engine failure clear area operations
Cat A single engine failure confined area operations
The maximum weight of the rotorcraftload combination to be used for OEI training shall be
obtained from the respective charts with IBF INSTALLED (Fig x for clear area hoist operations and Fig y for confined area hoist operations).
EASA APPROVED
Rev. 1
9.2-117 41
6.
6.1.
Fig. 5
1 RH
2 LH
6.2.
XSTA
YBL
3800 mm
+ 1000 mm
3800 mm
1000 mm
6.2.1.
The hoist load chart is given as an aid in determining the forward shift of the
longitudinal C.G. when picking up an external load.
The chart shows the longitudinal C.G. limits within which the aircraft (without the
external hoist load) must be, before an external hoist load of a given mass is
picked up from the ground.
9.2-117 42
For helicopters with installed reinforced rear crosstube the C.G. envelope shown
in the FMS 9.2-25 remains valid.
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1
When intersection point of longitudinal in-flight C.G. with helicopter gross mass is located
within inner C.G. envelope corresponding to hoist load, the C.G. of helicopter will remain
within permissible range when load is picked up.
EXAMPLE:
Fig.6
Determine:
Known:
Solution:
4350 mm
200 kg
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 1.1
9.2-117 43
6.2.2.
Max. allowable hoist load for a given in-flight C.G. and gross mass
Max. allowable hoist load is indicated by the smallest envelope, which encloses the
intersection point of in-flight gross mass and in-flight C.G.
3000
2800
A:
B:
C:
D:
2600
Gross
Mass
[kg]
2910
2910
1500
1840
STA
[mm]
4227
4369
4570
4180
GROSS MASS kg
2400
2200
2000
EC135_FLH_0624_R
1800
1600
1400
4150
4200
4250
4300
4350
4400
4450
4500
4550
4600
XSTA mm
Fig. 6
6.3.
LATERAL C.G.
The lateral C.G. will normally be within its limitations (refer to Para. 2.8.2.) when standard
loading practises / configurations are used and
pilots and co-pilots seats are occupied and hoist operator(s) with a maximum total
weight of 180 kg standing at the hoist position.
only the pilots seat is occupied and
for L/H side hoist installation, hoist operator(s) with a maximum total weight of
200 kg standing at the hoist position.
for R/H side hoist installation, hoist operator(s) with a maximum total weight of
120 kg standing at the hoist position.
If different configurations or non standard loading practises/ configurations are used
(i.e. aircraft loading configurations where the weight is not evenly spread left/ right), the
lateral C.G. should be determined before starting the hoist operation.
9.2-117 44
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1.1
7.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The external hoist system is attached with quick-release pins to the LH or RH side of the
main gear box deck. It provides lifting capability via a boom mounted, motor driven hoist.
The external hoist system consists of the hoist unit, a cable cutter assembly, an electric
driven swinging boom and a control pendant.
7.1.
HOIST UNIT
The hoist unit comprises all the driving mechanisms and safety devices required for
proper operation, namely:
Drive motor supplied with 28V DC providing continous operation up to 12000 RPM.
Translating cable drum to ensure correct and even winding of the cable on the drum.
Braking system consisting of friction and brake disks and a pressure plate. The oil
pump provides oil flow to cool the slipping clutch plates and the automatic brake.
A traction sheave assembly provides a constant minimum tension on the cable at all
times to prevent miswrap during no-load operation.
Automatic electric stop mechanism, operating when cable is fully reeled in and reeled
out.
Automatic hoist motor speed reduction when the cable is within 3 m (10 ft) before
fully reeled in or 3 m (10 ft) before fully reeled out.
7.2.
CABLE CUTTER
7.2.1.
7.2.2.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 1
9.2-117 45
7.3.
7.3.1.
Control switches
7.3.2.
Monitoring systems
ON and
9.2-117 46
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1
2
1
Overhead panel:
62
13
14
RAISE
FOR
CABLE
CUT
12
CABLE METER
OUT
OUT
REEL
CAUTION
OVERHEAT
BOOM
IN
IN
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 1
9.2-117 47
7.4.
HOIST HOOKS
Three different types of hooks can be installed on the hoist hook/damper unit.
Standard hook
BKD2_FLH_0187_R
7.4.1.
Fig. 8
Standard Hook (NHEC and HEC operations not requiring OEI performance) typical
installation
WARNING
CAUTION
The standard hook consists of a large load-bearing hook, a small non-load-bearing hook
and a small ring. The large hook shall be used to attach the main load. The small hook
and ring shall be used to attach very light loads or an anti-static line only.
The risk of dynamic roll-out from the main hook can be eliminated by using a means of
attachment (e.g. ring, special attachment plate) with an inner diameter of 40 mm or less.
Slide Lock Hook
BKD2_FLH_0268_R
7.4.2.
Fig. 9
Slide Lock Hook (NHEC and HEC operations not requiring OEI performance) typical
installation
9.2-117 48
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1
WARNING
The slide look hook consists of one large hook and a small ring. The large hook shall be
used to attach the main load. The small ring can be used to attach very light loads only
(e.g. an anti-static line).
The large hook can be protected from inadvertent opening (e.g. due to dynamic roll-out)
by manually sliding up a locking device.
D-Lock Hook
BKD2_FLH_0269_R
7.4.3.
Fig. 10
D-Lock Hook (HEC and HEC operations requiring OEI performance) typical installation
The D-Lock hook consists of one large hook and a small ring. The large hook shall be
used to attach the main load. The small ring can be used to attach very light loads only
(e.g. an anti-static line).
The large hook is automatically protected against inadvertent opening (e.g. due to dynamic roll out).
7.5.
CABLE OSCILLATIONS
The cable with or without load is susceptible to start oscillating under certain conditions
(e.g. abrupt maneuvers, wind gusts, non-vertical load pickup, flight with poor visual references). If not taken care of immediately, an oscillating load may rapidly become unmanageable. This can lead to:
Load swinging into objects (rock faces, ship structures), causing injuries to persons
on the hoist.
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 1
9.2-117 49
Load getting caught or wrapped around the end of the skids or other parts of the
helicopter, resulting in dangerous CG changes and possibly critical cable damage.
Load swinging into the main rotor or fenestron, causing loss of control to the helicopter.
The physics of the pendulum (Fig. 11), dictates that the pendulum amplitude is constant.
As a result, the angle and frequency of the oscillation will become larger as the cable is
reeled in. Conversely, the angle and frequency of oscillation will reduce when the cable is
reeled out, resulting in a less violent swinging of the load.
Hoist (schematic)
Short Cable
h1
EC135_FLH_0560_R
Long Cable
h1 = h2
h2
Fig. 11
Pendulum schematic
Therefore, the hoist should never be reeled in further if oscillations are present.
Small oscillations can often be damped by acting on the cable (grabbing it with hand or
feet and pushing it against the direction of swing). Care should be taken to avoid injuries
while doing this.
Large oscillations or divergent oscillations should be reduced by reelingout the cable
whenever possible. In this case, care should be taken to prevent the load from contacting the ground or obstacles.
Most often, a small forward speed of about 30 kt (up to 45 kt) will also have a stabilizing
effect on oscillations.
9.2-117 50
EASA APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
DATA
Rev. 1
7.6.
7.7.
VOX level increase: Press the W-VOX switch for a short time (0.3s to ~3s), to increase the VOX level (i.e. decrease the sensitivity of the hot mike function). By
pressing the W-VOX switch for more than 3 seconds, the VOX level will be reset to
the level set on the copilots ACU.
Volume level increase: Press the W-VOL switch for a short time (0.3s to ~3s), to increase the volume of intercom and radio. By pressing the W-VOL switch for more
than 3 seconds, the volume will be reset to the level set on the copilots ACU.
Fig. 12
MANUFACTURERS
EASA
APPROVED DATA
Rev. 1